Home

Service Manual: Kir-C2, K-C2 (B121/B122/B123) Aficio 2015/Aficio

1. 3 43 3 11 3 DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR 3 44 3 11 4 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR eee 3 45 3 11 5 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR eee 3 45 3 11 6 DUPLEX CONTROL 2 2 22 222222222222222220 3 45 3 12 OTHER REPLACEMENT dee ne eee eee Renee 3 46 2 12 1T QUENCHING LAMP de able eiie 3 46 3 12 2 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 3 46 3 12 3 BICU BASE ENGINE IMAGE CONTROL UNIT 3 47 3 124 MAIN MO TO c 3 47 3 12 5 REAR EXHAUST FAN B123 3 48 3 12 6 LEFT EXHAUST occ e e r e trottoir 3 48 3 12 7 PSU POWER SUPPLY UNIT 2 222 toc 2 298 22 0 3 48 ee tate et aah ae te cia aes ela et I LM LIE 3 49 Replacement Procedure emend denen eek 3 49 Gear Arrangement the 3 51 3 13 COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING 3 52 3 19 PRINTING ae rae Pe ay decode eco coe 3 52 Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 3 52 Blank sce cette eet te ui tute au D PU MEE 3 53 Main Scan Magnification 2 3 53 3 193 2 SCANNING eene oes S a roS asses aus ees aure 3 54 Registration Platen Mo
2. 5 2 Activating Moe eee ee pH ex EE eR 5 2 Quitting Programs Ending S SP 5 2 5 1 2 SP MODE TABLES BASIC 4 4 petis 5 3 SP1 XXX 2 22 2212 22122212221 ecce 5 3 SP2 XXX M vc 5 6 SPA XXX Scanner Hee heeded 5 11 SP5 XXX Mode t 5 16 SPoSOUC Perpherals eoe pete 5 19 SP7 XXX Data Log sno alien teed 5 20 idees datio ideae dados ares testes Ente ste due 5 24 5 1 3 SP MODE TABEES MEPB 22222622000 tannin 5 27 I eei 5 27 SP2 XXX GUM oae tan beet deuote ctp cerato c tue 5 30 SP4 XXKX Scanner a ce dtt dte tas e ie ete ete tia 5 34 SP5 XXX 5 41 SP6 XXX Peniphicrals ee ee ee ee A 5 54 SPT XXX Data 5 55 Nix etai aan ees 5 60 SE SEXO BIC In eed foi 5 71 5 1 4 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION 5 73 5 1 5 ID SENSOR ERROR ANALYSIS 5 2 221 5 74 5 1 6 DISPLAY APS DATA 5 4 301 1 5 75 Sensor POoSIDOLS coe
3. C B6581910 WMF Remove the dummy cover from the basic operation panel and install the copy key A or a Remove the dummy panel from the basic operation panel and install the fax panel B Install the dummy cover C on the optional operation panel Install the fax panel D on the optional operation panel Install the fax key E or e on the optional operation panel 1 December 2003 MFP EXPANSION Step 9 Printer Scanner and Fax Keys es E e A a 2 15 T D c F B B6581911 WMF Remove the dummy cover from the basic operation panel and install the copy key A or a Remove the dummy panel from the basic operation panel and install the fax panel B Install the scanner key C or c on the optional operation panel Install the fax panel D on the optional operation panel Install the fax key E or e on the optional operation panel Remove the dummy panel from the basic panel and install the printer panel F Install the printer key G or g on the basic operation panel MFP EXPANSION 1 December 2003 1 12 4 SETTINGS Step 10 MFP Settings and Time Settings Turn the main switch on Start the SP mode Select SP5 801 001 and execute the initialization Turn the main switch off and
4. B621 6 2 31 PAPER HANDING B621 6 2 92 JUNCTION GATE 621 6 2 3 3 PAPER SIZE LIMITATION edocet ete tree egeta B621 6 2 4 EXE TRAY LED iste te ua EN dud MS B621 7 25 TRAY OPEN SWI 621 8 3 22 lt 621 9 S T PAPER AIM S e enit ue e eet ee tua E UL EM B621 9 3 2 PAPER JAM 21 4 00000000000000000000000000 B621 10 3 2 1 RESETTING THE COPIER oen eee dtm B621 10 3 2 2 COMPONENT RELATED PAPER B621 11 Motor Related Paper 2 4 B621 11 Solenoid Related Paper nn B621 11 ADF B616 AND ARDF B617 ADF B616 AND ARDF B617 cerne B616 1 SPECIFICATIONS iioi reete eee SPEC 1 1 lt 55 E EET ERE Er FER ERE RE SPEC 1 Duplex Unit B123 only 2 SPEC 5 2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES tnc e Lee tee eae SPEC 6 2 1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION eee SPEC 6 North America Europe Asia Taiwan SPEC 6 China OF ete tte SPEC
5. 6 58 6 12 4 PAPER SEPARATION 6 58 6 13 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER 6 59 o e T OVER VTE A achat hee 6 59 6 13 2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM 6 60 FUSING EBERT me 6 60 Drive Release Mechanism 6 60 Contact Release Control isi 6 60 Drive Release 6 61 6 13 3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT 6 62 6 13 4 PRESSURE ROLLER ne ron on et eod 6 62 6 13 5 FUSING TEMPERATURE 6 63 ae a ae 6 63 e han 6 64 6 13 6 OVERHEAT 6 66 B T4 DUPLEX UNIT 3 2 ERE DUANE URP ER DER ONERE 6 67 oO IL TOOVERALDE Sede rotat Ce event Etui ote 6 67 6 14 2 DRIVE 6 68 6 14 3 xn GR denda 6 69 Larger than A4 Short edge
6. JEULON c6 vdS asieoD JEUJON sydesBojoug Auougdjixej JEWJON uonoeuo 6 gl paigesiq 106 peiqesiq peigesiq UpIM eur 19314 JEuJuoN c 6 vdS L 6 vdS QI JEWJON JEWJON pilos 19414 066 745 eeuv Xe9AA Je M Buoys BWJON 19114 BuueyJ peigeu3 peigeu3 Satie ses Buoys Buoys uo peigeu3 epis 497 pos epis oj opis Ajuo peigeu3 Buyon peiqeus uojeoyiubey ueos 193j4 Butujoouis ews qi ones 1eeur1 1eeur ones eau QI ones uonoeyes 1x91 206765 uonoeyew xe Aisueq ojug xe 1eeur1 Jeeur ones seul Aysusq oioud Arsueq oyd 1eeur qi ones 1e uonoeuo B jeuue s v6 vdS peigeu3 Lv6 vdS uo 4 peigeu3 Pelqeu3 uono9402 eur pe g peiqeus UO O9OD eur eiuM peiqeu3 uonoeuo2 uoneouiuBelA UOnoaJJ02 Duipeus punosby
7. Authentication error You need to reinstall the program e Store the correct data in the SD card If the firmware update program is interrupted for example by power failure keep the SD card inserted and turn the mains switch off and on The firmware update program restarts If you do not do so the message Reboot after Card insert is displayed when you turn the main switch on 5 94 1 December 2003 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 5 2 3 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD DOWNLOAD Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card NOTE This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced 1 Before switching the machine off execute SP5990 001 SMC Print You will need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails 2 Switch the copier main power switch off Insert the SD card into service slot C3 then switch the copier on 4 Execute SP5824 001 NVRAM Data Upload then press the Execute key When uploading is finished the following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card The fileis saved to the path and filename NVRAM lt serial number gt NV Here is an example with Serial Number 0700017 NVRAM B0700017 NV 5 In order to prevent an error during the download be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded NOTE N
8. Specifies the end of the daylight saving time SP5 307 1 validates SP5 307 4 User Code Count Clear 5404 1 Initializes the user code counter PM Alarm Interval PM Alarm Interval Printout O 9999 0 OK copies step Specifies when the PM alarm occurs PM Alarm Original Count Alarm 0 Off 1 On Enables or disables the original count alarm 5504 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not included 0 3 3 1 step 0 Zero Off 1 Low 2 5K jams 2 Medium 3K jams 3 High 6K jams 5505 0 255 20 1 hundred sheets step 5507 Specifies the number of paper in hundred used as the error alarm level The error alarm starts if 5 SC codes or more are generated before the copier prints the specified number of paper When the copier has printed the specified number of paper the SC code counter of this SP is cleared to zero Supply Alarm 5507 1 Paper Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On DFU 5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On DFU 5507 128 Interval Others 00250 10000 1000 1 Step DFU 5507 132 Interval A3 5507 133 Interval A4 5507 134 Interval A5 5507 141 Interval B4 5507 142 Interval B5 5507 160 Interval DLT 5507 164 Interval LG 5507 166 Interval LT 5507 172 Interval HLT 5 42 1 December 2003 5508
9. 9 lt 474 E H B121R960 WMF A R DF or platen cover Operation panel top rear cover er 3 3 4 Exposure glass 3 4 1 Loosen the 2 screws A F Slide the 1st and 2nd scanners or one of them to align the following holes and marks er Overview e The adjustment holes in the first scanner e The adjustment holes in the second scanner e The alignment marks on the frames Insert the positioning tools D E through the holes and marks Check that the scanner belts B C G H are properly set between the bracket and the 1st scanner Tighten the screws A F Remove the positioning tools 10 Reassemble the machine and check the operation SCANNER UNIT 1 December 2003 Adjusting the Second Scanner Contact Points 1 A R DF or platen cover P9 Operation panel top rear cover 3 3 4 Exposure glass er 3 4 1 Rear exhaust fan A x 2 Controller bracket B x 3 Disconnect the platen cover sensor connector C Rear frame D x 7 8 Scale bracket E x 2 Qu EI chic cgo B121R915 WMF H G B121R961 WMF 9 Loosen the 2 screws F 10 Slide the 2nd scanner to align the following holes and marks Overview e The adjustment holes in the first scanner e The adjustment holes in the second scanner e The alignment marks on the frames 11 Insert the positioning tools G H through the holes and marks 12 Check that the scanner bel
10. Custom O O O O Oj O 3 3 O S O 3 O X O 3 Z Z O O O O O O X X O X O X O X O gt lt x Z Z Z Z Z Z z o Z O z o z o Z z z X Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O Z O Z O Z O lt X Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O Z O Z O Z O X Z Z X Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O Z O Z O Z O xz SIGN X Detected Opt paper tray and By pass Processed One bin tray O Not detected Opt paper tray and By pass Not processed One bin tray M Selected manually K Specified from the key pad NOTE Custom W 90 to 297 mm L 148 to 600 mm SPEC 11 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION M B C D H E J K B121V902 WMF SPEC 12 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS Unit Component Machine Code Diagram Copier 1 tray non duplex model B121 H Copier 2 tray non duplex model B122 D Copier 2 tray with duplex B123 G Platen cover optional B406 F ADF optional B616 A ARDF optional B617 A Paper tray unit 1 tray optional B385 E Paper tray unit 2 trays optional B384 1 1 bin tray optional B621 C Tray heater optional Optics anti condensation heater optional GW GW controller optional B658 J Fax Fax controller optional B620 L Handset optional B433 B Printer Printer scanner controller optional B622 M scanner PostScript 3 optional B681 K Network IEEE
11. IEEE 802 11b 5840 4 SSID Enter ID Enters a unique ID up to 32 characters long to identify the device when it is operating in an area with another wireless LAN network 5840 6 Channel MAX JA 1 14 14 1 NA 1 11 11 1 EU 1 13 13 1 China Taiwan Same as NA Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels Displayed only when the option 802 11b for wireless LAN is installed 5840 7 Channel MIN JA 1 14 1 1 NA 1 11 1 1 EU 1 13 1 1 China Taiwan Same as NA Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels Displayed only when the option 802 11b for wireless LAN is installed 5840 11 WEP Key Select 00 Key 1 0000 0000 01 Key 22 Reserved 0000 0001 10 Key 3 Reserved 0000 0010 11 Key 4 Reserved 0000 0011 Selects the WEP key 00 11 00 1 binary 5840 20 5842 WEP Mode 0 Max 64 bit 10 characters 1 Max 128 bit 10 26 characters Determines t
12. PrtPGS Ppr Size 8442 9 PrtPGS Ppr Size HLT 8442 10 Ico ow PrtPGS Ppr SIze Full Bleed 8442 254 PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Standard 8442 255 8443 O O O JO OIOQOIOIOIO O0 PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Custom F PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the number of pages printed by the fax application program 8443 1 F PrtPGS Ppr Size A3 8443 2 PrtPGS Ppr Size A4 8443 3 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8443 4 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8443 5 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8443 6 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8443 7 AQ WO EI JS PrtPGS Ppr Size 8443 8 PrtPGS Ppr Size LT 8443 9 PrtPGS Ppr Size HLT 8443 10 d ILU PrtPGS Ppr SIze Full Bleed 8443 254 TH TI mm PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Standard 5 65 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 8443 255 F PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Custom 8444 P PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the number of pages printed by the printer application program PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size A4 PrtPGS Ppr Size A5 PrtPGS Ppr Size B4 PrtPGS Ppr Size B5 PrtPGS Ppr Size DLT PrtPGS Ppr Size LG PrtPGS Ppr Size LT PrtPGS Ppr Size HLT F 8444 1 8444 2 8444 3 8444 4 8444 5 8444 6 8444 7 8444 8 8444 9 8444 10
13. SP4 015 Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during initialization or copying e Scanner home position sensor defective e Scanner drive motor defective e Scanner home position sensor connector defective e Scanner drive motor connector defective e BICU board defective Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition during initialization or copying e Scanner home position sensor defective e Scanner drive motor defective e Scanner home position sensor connector defective e Scanner drive motor connector defective e BICU board defective SBU white black level correction error The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the white level twenty times consecutively e Exposure lamp defective e Dirty white plate e Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning SP4 015 e BICU board defective e SBU board defective Communication Error between BICU and SBU The BICU board cannot detect the SBU connect signal 4 2 e The flat cable between the BICU board and the SBU has a poor connection e The flat cable between the BICU board and the SBU is damaged e BICU board defective e SBU defective 1 December 2003 No Definition Symptom SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Po
14. See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed TABLE OF CONTENTS T en ae eet 1 1 1 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS uin ro ino onu 1 1 1 1 41 ENVIRONMENT a cd ia ht pid C e NE Di d nu DERE e 1 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL oce o uod teet te Mod se 1 2 1 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE 1 3 1 1 4 POWER 6 1 3 1 2 COPIER INSTALEEATIODNL 44 DH TI C rette toe 1 4 1 2 1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS 1 4 1 2 2 ACCESSORY CHECK uiii pit ird o pi oie e piel pitt pied plates 1 4 1 2 3 INSTALLATION 1 5 1 3 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION eee 1 8 13 1 ACCESSORY CHECK EDOPRPOPPREDeD Up emen 1 8 1 3 2 INSTALLATION PROGEDURE ihre rere eee 1 8 To ARDE INSTALLATION wy chit avoid iit cq eqq bit 1 9 1 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK ite tite istius 1 9 1 4 2 INSTALLATION 1 9 1 5 ADF INS TTAEEATIOIN iio eiie spei pete tI nene BRUM 1 12 1 5 1 ACCESSORY CHECK iint eet e ne tenent 1 12 1 5 2 INSTALLATION PROGEDURE 5 iore ere eee 1 12 1 6 TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 15 1 6 T ACCESSORY CHECK 1 15 1
15. Self diagnostic Error Clock Generator A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C bus e Replace the controller board Network I F Abnormal NIB interface error e NIB defective e Controller board defective IEEE 1394 I F Abnormal IEEE1394 interface error e IEEE1394 interface board defective e Controller board defective IEEE802 11b error card not detected power on Wireless LAN card not detected at power on e Poor connection e Defective wireless LAN card e Defective controller IEEE802 11b error card not detected during operation Wireless LAN card not detected during operation e Poor connection e Defective wireless LAN card e Defective controller IEEE802 11b error Wireless LAN card error detected e Poor connection e Defective wireless LAN card e Defective controller IEEE802 11b interface board error Wireless LAN interface board error detected e Poor connection e Defective wireless LAN interface board USB I F Error USB interface error detected e Defective controller SD card authentication error The SD card does not contain a correct license code e Data corruption SD card access error 1 After the program saved in the SD card starts running the SD card is removed e SD card removed from the slot 4 8 1 December 2003 No Definition Sy
16. 11 x 81 2 HLT SEF 51 2 x 81 2 HLT LEF SIGN K NOTE Custom O S X X O Z O x O x O O O O O 3 3 3 X X O Z O x X X X X O x O x O X OI O O O X gt lt X X X x O X O gt lt OIZ S O A O S oO S O A O x S x S x S x O x O Xx O x X O A O X O x OI X O Z 3 Z Z Z 3 Z O Z O Z O Z S O X O Z O Z O X O Z S X Z S S X O Z O Xx O Z Z O A O Z O Z O X O 3 S X Z S S X O Z O xs 81 2 x 51 2 Detected Opt paper tray and By pass Processed One bin tray Not detected Opt paper tray and By pass Not processed One bin tray Selected manually Specified from the key pad W 90 to 297 mm L 148 to 600 mm SPEC 10 1 December 2003 Continued Paper Size W x L By pass SPECIFICATIONS North America Europe Executive SEF 7 1 4 101 2 Executive LEF 101 2 x 71 4 F SEF 8 x 13 F LEF 13 x 8 Foolscap SEF 81 2 x 13 Foolscap LEF 13 x 81 2 Folio SEF 81 4 x 13 Folio LEF 13 x 81 4 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm 8K LEF 390 x 267 mm 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm C5 Env SEF 162 x 229 mm C6 Env SEF 114 x 162 mm DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm Com10 SEF 41 8 x 91 2 Monarch SEF 37 8 x 71 2
17. 1st tray 0 10 5 1 mm step 2nd tray B122 B123 only 0 10 5 1 mm step Optional tray 0 10 5 1 mm step By pass feed 0 10 6 1 mm step Duplex 0 20 6 1 mm step 5 27 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 1007 Display By pass 1007 1 Display By pass Displays the by pass paper width switch output Fusing Idling Selects whether or not fusing idling is performed Normally disabled in this machine However enable this mode if fusing is incomplete on the 1st and 2nd copies which may occur if the room is cold Fusing Idling 0 No 1 Yes Fusing Temperature Adjustment Adjusts the target fusing temperature Center indicates the center of the roller End indicates the front and rear ends 1105 1 Warm Up Center 140 180 160 1 C step 1105 2 Warm Up End 1105 3 Standby Center 140 170 155 1 C step 1105 4 Standby End 140 165 150 1 C step 1105 5 Copying Center 11056 Copying End 140 185 160 1 C step 1105 7 Low Level 2 Center 0 80 60 1 C step 1105 8 Low Level 2 End 1105 9 Thick Center 1105 10 Thick End 1105 11 Warm Up Low Center 1105 12 Warm Up Low End 140 185 1757 1 C step 140 180 170 1 C step Display Fusing Display Fusing Center Display Fusing End Displays the fusing temperature on the center o
18. A current feedback signal for the transfer roller is not detected e High voltage supply board defective e Poor connection of the PCU e Transfer separation unit set incorrectly e Transfer roller damaged Transfer roller leak error 2 A current leak signal for the transfer roller is detected A current feedback signal for the transfer roller is not detected e High voltage supply board defective e Poor connection of the PCU e Transfer separation unit set incorrectly e Transfer roller damaged Main motor lock A main motor lock signal is not detected for more than 7 consecutive checks 700 ms after the main motor starts to rotate or the lock signal is not detected for more than 7 consecutive checks during rotation after the last signal e Too much load on the drive mechanism e Main motor defective Tray 2 lift motor malfunction Optional Pa per Tray units The paper lift sensor fails to activate twice continuously after the tray lift motor has been on for 18 seconds e Paper lift sensor defective e Tray lift motor defective e Too much load on the drive mechanism e Poor tray lift motor connection Tray 3 lift motor malfunction optional paper tray units The paper lift sensor fails to activate twice continuously after the tray lift motor has been on for 18 seconds e Paper lift sensor defective e Tray lift motor defective e Too much load on the drive mechanism e Poor
19. Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory The value is only displayed and cannot be changed This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI The ID is displayed as either 6 byle or 8 byte binary 5846 2 Machine ID Clear For Delivery Server Clears ID Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable After clearing the ID the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on 5846 3 Maximum Entries 2000 50000 2000 1 Changes the maximum number o If a value smaller than the presen f entries that UCS can handle t value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed 5846 4 Delivery Server Model 0 Not used 1 561 Provided 2 SG1 Package 3 SG2 Provided 4 SG2 Package Changes the model of the transfe r server registered for the I O device 5846 5 Delivery Server Capability Bit 7 1 Comment information Bit 6 1 Address direct entry possible Bit 5 1 Mail Rx confirmation possible Bit 4 1 Address book auto update Bit 3 1 Fax Rx function 0 255 0 2 Changes the capability of the server registered for the I O device 5846 6 Delivery Server Retry Timer 0 255 0 1 Sets the interval for retry attempts when t
20. Os 45 59 aS Duplex Inverter Roller Duplex Entrance Sensor Upper Transport Roller Middle Transport Roller Duplex Exit Sensor Lower Transport Roller Junction Gate Duplex Inverter Sensor RON DUPLEX UNIT 1 December 2003 6 14 2 DRIVE MECHANISM 2 3 4 6 B121D969 WMF 1 Duplex Inverter Roller 4 Duplex Transport Motor 2 Duplex Inverter Motor 5 Lower Transport Roller 3 Upper Transport Roller 6 Middle Transport Roller 1 December 2003 DUPLEX UNIT 6 14 3 BASIC OPERATION To increase the productivity of the duplex unit copies are printed as follows Larger than A4 Short edge LT Short edge The paper feed path can hold only one sheet of copy paper at a time Example 8 pages The number A in the illustration shows the order of pages The number B in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper if black this indicates the second side N N N N 2 7 4 3 _6 eS gt e7 Q o B121D970 WMF Detailed Descriptions B121D922 WMF DUPLEX UNIT 1 December 2003 Up to A4 Short edge LT Short edge The paper feed path can hold two sheets of copy paper Example 8 pages The number A in the illustration shows the order of pages The number B in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy pap
21. This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 5 15 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP5 XXX Mode All Indicators On All LEDs turn on The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds Press the reset key to end this program A3 DLT Double Count 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 Disabled if the size is undetected Selects whether the machine counts twice for each sheet of A3 11 x 17 If this is set to Yes is selected the total mechanical counter and the current user counter will both increment by two for each A3 11 x 17 sheet Optional Counter Type 0 None 11 MF key card Increment 12 MF key card Decrement Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as coin lock Clr OP Count Remv 0 Yes 1 Standby only 2 No Determines under which conditions the copy job settings are reset when the key counter is removed With 0 the settings are cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job or midway through a job With 1 they are only cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job With 2 they are not cleared at all under either condition With duplex copies the job settings are always preserved regardless of the setting of this SP mode Count Up Timing 0 Feed In 1 Exit Selects whether the key counter increments at time of paper feed in or at time of paper exit 5127 APS Mode 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 5127 1 Enables
22. 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals The both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the ADF are scanned C Total Scan PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals The both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the ADF are scanned F Total Scan PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals The both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the ADF are scanned S Total Scan PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals The both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the ADF are scanned T L Size Scan PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals by copying jobs and scanning jobs classified by paper size The following size is counted A3 DLT and larger S L Size Scan PGS A3 DLT Larger 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals by scanning jobs classified by paper size The following size is counted A3 DLT and larger ADF Org Feed 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step ADF Org Feed Front Displays the total number of scanned front sides of originals fed from the ADF ADF Org Feed Back Displays the total number of scanned reverse sid
23. 3 a p 1 PCI bus a 3 Optional GW gt Video Path Control Lee Controller 1 IPU 1 Optional Printer Controller VCU BICU 1 LD Unit B121D919 WMF 6 17 IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 Original Modes The machine has 10 original modes There are two text modes three photo modes and five special modes The original mode key on the operation panel has two settings text and photo With the default settings the machine uses Normal Text Text 1 when the Text indicator is lit and uses Photo Priority Photo 1 when the Photo indicator is lit The customer can allocate different modes to the Text and Photo indicators with User Tools Copier Features Image Adjustment Note that the Text indicator does not have to be allocated to a Text mode and the Photo key does not have to be allocated to a Photo mode For example the Text indicator can be allocated to Photo 3 and the Photo indicator can be allocated to Special 4 If the user wishes to customize one of the original modes the technician can change the settings using SP4 922 to SP4 942 Refer to SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step However only one of the original modes can be customized at any one time SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step The table on the next page shows which SP modes are used for each step of image processing e 4 921 Selects which o
24. B B1211913 WMF COPIER INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 4 Separate the PCU into the upper part and the lower part 2 x 5 5 Puta sheet of paper on a level surface and place the upper part on it NOTE This prevents foreign material from getting on the sleeve rollers B1211903 WMF 6 Distribute a pack of developer A to all openings equally NOTE 1 Do not spill the developer on the gears B If you have spilled it remove the developer by using a magnet or magnetized screwdriver 2 Do not turn the gear B too much The developer may spill B1211914 WMF Reassemble the PCU and reinstall it Shake the toner bottle C several times NOTE Do not remove the bottle cap D before you shake the bottle 9 Remove the bottle cap D and install the bottle on the holder NOTE Do not touch the inner cap E 10 Set the holder with the toner bottle in the machine B1211915 WMF 1 6 1 December 2003 COPIER INSTALLATION 11 Pull out the paper tray A and turn the paper size dial to the appropriate size Adjust the positions of the end and side guides 2 15 T 8 i NOTE To move the side guides release the green lock on the rear side guide B1211916 WMF 12 Install the optional ARDF ADF or platen cover er 1 3 1 4 1 5 13 Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main switch 14 Activate the SP mode and execute Devipr Initialize SP2 214 0
25. B Hot roller B121R996 WMF C Place an OHP sheet on the by pass feed table Enter SP mode and run SP1 109 Press the Execute key Pu qe se Press The machine feeds the OHP sheet into the fusing section stops it there for 20 seconds then ejects it to the copy tray Press the _ key Quit the SP mode 7 Check that the nip band the opaque stripe across the ejected OHP sheet is symmetrical with both ends slightly thicker than the center NOTE There is no standard value for the nip band on this machine Make the adjustment based on the band s appearance 8 Ifthe band is not as described above change the position of the spring hooks C one on each side and then check the band again NOTE The higher hook position produces greater tension 3 41 FUSING 1 December 2003 3 10 9 CLEANING ROLLER 1 Pressure roller and bushings 3 10 7 2 Cleaning roller A B121R930 WMF 3 42 1 December 2003 DUPLEX UNIT DUPLEX MODELS ONLY 3 11 DUPLEX UNIT DUPLEX MODELS ONLY 3 11 1 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR 1 Open the right door 2 Sensor bracket A x 1 NOTE Another bracket B comes off with the sensor bracket 3 Duplex exit sensor C EP x 1 te 96 os O0 5 5 9 lt 474 B121R997 WMF 3 11 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Open the right door 2 Lift the duplex guide D 3 Entrance sensor bracket E and bracket cover F x 2 4 Duplex entrance sen
26. Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor Paper is caught at the duplex entrance sensor Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor Paper is caught at the duplex exit sensor Paper does not reach the one bin tray Paper is caught at the one bin tray 5 86 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 15 SMC PRINT SP5 990 SP5 990 outputs machine status lists 1 Select SP5 990 2 Select a menu e Basic machine 001 All 002 SP 003 UP 004 Log or 005 Big Font e MFP machine 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Net File Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 040 Parts Alarm Counter Print 064 Normal Count Print 065 User Code Counter 066 Key Operator Counter 067 Contact List Print 069 Heading1 print 071 Heading3 print 072 Group List Print 128 ACC Pattern 129 User Color Pattern or 160 ACC Pattern Scan NOTE The output given by the menu Big Font is suitable for faxing 3 Press the Execute key e Basic machine copy mode is activated er Activating Copy Mode in section 5 1 1 Specify copy settings and press the key The machine status lists is output e MFP machine The machine status list is output 4 To return to the SP mode press the key SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003
27. Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from the copier printer 120 Vac 120 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed 220 240 Vac 230 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed Power Consumption Max 30 W Copying printing 23 W Optional Tray Heater On Average 17 W Copying printing 15 W Optional Tray Heater On Weight 25 kg 55 Ib Size W x D x H 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm One Bin Tray Paper Size Width 140 297 mm Length 140 432 Output Standard Position Center Paper Weight 60 105 g m 16 28 lbs Tray Capacity 100 sheets A4 LEF 80 g m 20 Ib Power Source 5 VDC 24 VDC from the copier Power Consumption Max 20 W Weight 1 55 kg Base unit 1 1 kg Tray 0 45 kg Size W x D x H 461 mm x 478 mm x 104 mm 508 mm x 478 mm x 104 mm when tray extended SPEC 17
28. SSID Setting Enter the SSID setting The setting is case sensitive Oo NOAA Channel This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected Range 1 14 default 11 NOTE The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries 9 WEP Privacy Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission In order to unlock encoded data the same WEP key is required on the receiving side There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys Range of Allowed Settings 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit 26 characters 10 Bandwidth Status This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth One of the following is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN Good 76 100 Fair 41 75 Poor 21 40 Unavailable 0 20 1 44 1 December 2003 IEEE1284 IEEE1394 INTERFACE 11 Transmission Speed Press the Next button to display more settings then select the transmission speed for the mode Auto 11 Mbps 5 5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps default Auto This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access point depending on which mode is selected NOTE For the Ad Hoc Mode this is the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network For the Infrastructure Mode this is the distance between the machine and the closest access point 11Mbps 140 m 153 yd 5 5
29. Upper P Size SW 1 Lower P Size SW 1 BK Upper Paper End S Paper detected Not detected BK Lower Paper End S Paper detected Not detected BK Up P Size SW 1 BK Low P Size SW 1 BK Up P Height S 2 BK Low P Height S 2 BK Upper Lift S At upper limit Not at upper limit BK type 3 Duplex Installed Installed Not installed Lower Lift S At upper limit Not at upper limit Main M Lock Locked Not locked Polygon M Lock Locked Not locked BK Lift M Lock Locked Not locked Total CO Install Installed Not installed Key CO Install Installed Not installed L Synchronization Detected Not detected DF Position S Detected Not detected DF Cover Open S Detected Not detected DF Original Set S 5 78 Detected Not detected 1 December 2003 Sensor Switch SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 01H 00H DF Registration S Detected Not detected DF Exit S Detected Not detected DF Trailing S Detected Not detected DF Reverse S Detected Not detected Platen Cover S Open Closed 1 bin Installed Installed Not installed 1 bin Exit S Paper detected Not detected 1 bin Paper S Paper detected Not detected 1 bin Tray S Open Closed Fan Motor Lock High speed Not high speed 2 Tray BK Install Installed Not installed
30. and after replacing or adjusting any of the following parts First or second scanner Lens Block Scanner Motor Polygonal Mirror Motor Paper Tray Paper Side Fence 2 For detailed explanations about how to access and use the SP modes see Section 5 3 13 1 PRINTING NOTE 1 Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments 2 Use the Trimming Area Pattern SP5 902 No 10 to print the test pattern for the printing adjustments below 3 Set SP 5 902 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 1 Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station and adjust each of these registrations using SP1 001 2 Check the side to side registration for each paper feed station and adjust these registrations using SP1 002 Adjust the trays in order the 1st tray first then the 2nd tray etc Tray SP mode Specification Any paper tray SP1 001 1 By pass feed SP1 001 2 2 1 5mm Duplex SP1 001 3 1st tray SP1 002 1 A 2nd tray SP1 002 2 3rd tray Optional PFU tray 1 SP1 002 3 4th tray Optional PFU tray 2 SP1 002 4 By pass feed SP1 002 5 Duplex SP1 002 6 B121R505 WMF A Leading Edge Registration B Side to side Registration 1 December 2003 Blank Margin COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING NOTE If the leading edge or side to side regi
31. when certain modes are selected details below and are automatically applied The strength levels for the MTF are controlled by SP4 932 The levels for line width correction and independent dot erase are controlled by SP4 927 and 4 928 respectively The MTF filters bring out sharpness The three MTF filters are Edge Solid Image and Low ID Line Line width correction adjusts the line width Independent dot erase removes unwanted dots from the image MTF Filter Adjustment Edge In order to determine whether a given dot is part of an edge or not the IPU checks all surrounding dots vertical horizontal and diagonal If the IPU determines that the dot is part of an edge the machine applies the MTF filter for edges using the value set in SP4 930 The higher the setting the sharper the image However this is only used when the customer uses Text 1 Text 2 Photo 1 3 Special 1 Special 2 or Special 5 The default value is 0 for each mode However the actual strength of O differs from mode to mode MTF Filter Adjustment Solid If the IPU detects that the dot is not part of an edge the machine applies the MTF filter for solid areas using the value set in SP4 931 The higher the setting the sharper the image However this is only used when the customer uses Text 2 The default value is 0 for each mode However the actual strength of O differs from mode to mode MTF Filter Adjustment Low ID Line The
32. 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications Sort Stack Staple Booklet Z Fold Punch Other C PrtPGS FIN 0 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application Sort Stack Staple Booklet Z Fold Punch Other F PrtPGS FIN 0 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application Note e Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available Sort Stack Staple Booklet Z Fold Punch Other P PrtPGS FIN 0 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application Sort Stack 5 68 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Staple Booklet Z Fold Punch Other S PrtPGS FIN 0 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application Sort Stack Staple Booklet Z Fold Punch Other Dev Counter 0 9999999 0 1 Counts the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners Note For machines that do not support color the Black toner count is the same as the Total count Toner Remain 0 100 0 1 This SP displays the percent of
33. 0 4 0 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for 0 None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 3 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 Scanner Gamma Selects text or photo as the priority output mode This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 6 5 4 IPU Scanner Gamma Copy 0 System default 1 Text 2 Photo Scanner Gamma Fax Scanner Gamma Scanner Notch Selection 6 5 4 Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs e Normally the center notch is 3 range 1 5 If 1 is selected each notch shifts down becomes lighter If 1 is selected each notch shifts up becomes darker e This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 Notch Selection Copy 7 1 Light 0 Normal 1 Dark Notch Selection Fax Notch Selection Scanner Texture Removal 6 5 4 Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion 0 The default value for each mode is used Text 1 Photo 2 Special 2 and Special 5 have a default of 3 and Photo 1 3 have a default of 1 1 No removal applied 2 5 Removal applied at the level specified here The higher the setting level the less clear the image will become more texture removal This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Texture Removal Copy 0 6 0 1 step Texture Removal Fax Texture Removal Scan
34. 3 Paper size switch D x 1 C B121R991 WMF IMAGE TRANSFER 1 December 2003 3 9 IMAGE TRANSFER 3 9 1 IMAGE TRANSFER ROLLER CAUTION Do not touch the transfer roller surface with bare hands 1 Open the right door 2 Liftthe plastic holders A with the image transfer roller B NOTE Leave the springs under the holders When reassembling make sure that the pegs C on the holders D engage with the springs B121R992 WMF 3 9 2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR Open the right door Plastic cover E Image transfer roller er 3 9 1 Te we orem Push down on the notch F to free the sensor 5 Image density sensor EP x 1 E B121R993 WMF 1 December 2003 3 10 FUSING 3 10 1 FUSING UNIT NCAUTION FUSING The fusing unit can become very hot Be sure that it has cooled down sufficiently before handling it 1 Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine 2 Front right cover er 3 3 7 3 Open the right door 4 Fusing unit A x 2 EB x 4 3 10 2 THERMISTOR 1 Fusing unit 3 10 1 2 Thermistors A x 1 EB x 1 B121R925 WMF B121R924 WMF Replacement Adjustment FUSING 1 December 2003 3 10 3 FUSING LAMPS B121R926 WMF B121R927 WMF Fusing unit er 3 10 1 Separate the hot roller section A from the pressure roller section B x 4 Front holding plate C x 1 R
35. 6 4 Vt gt Vts or Vref 45 16 T 30 see note 3 Vt Vts or Vref S toner end T 30 see note 3 NOTE 1 The value of t can be changed using SP2 922 default 0 4 second 2 The value of T can be changed using SP2 923 default 30 seconds 3 T 30 means that toner is supplied intermittently in a 1 3 duty cycle 1 s on 2 s off for 30 seconds 6 46 1 December 2003 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS ID Sensor Readings are abnormal if any of the following conditions occur e Vsg lt 2 5V e Vsg 3 5V when maximum power 979 is applied e Vsp 2 2 5V e Vsg Vsp 1 0V e Vt gt 4 5V or Vt lt 0 2V The above ID sensor values can be checked using SP2 221 When this is detected the machine changes the value of Vref to 2 5 V then does the toner density control process in a similar way to sensor control mode 2 No SC code is generated if the ID sensor is defective TD Sensor The TD sensor output is checked every copy If the readings from the TD sensor become abnormal the machine changes the toner density control mode to fixed supply mode 2 and the toner supply amount per page is always 200 ms regardless of the value of SP2 925 If the machine detects the TD sensor error condition 10 times consecutively an SC code is generated 8C390 and the machine must be repaired o Ss 59 3 6 47 DEVELOPMENT
36. HP Sensor Detected Not detected Duplex Fan M Lock Locked Not locked 1 Paper Size Copier Europe North America China Paper Feed Unit Europe North America China By Pass Tray Europe North America China 2 Paper Amount Near end About 2596 About 7596 About 100 3 Available Paper Feed Unit None 2 tray paper feed unit 1 tray paper feed unit 5 79 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5 1 9 OUTPUT CHECK SP5 804 Conducting an Output Check CAUTION To prevent mechanical or electrical damage do not keep an electrical component on for a long time Select SP5 804 Select the number see the table below corresponding to the component Select ON To stop the operation select OFF T o e Mu ct Output Check Table Number 005 006 040 and 041 may not respond when the fusing temperature is high Component Main Motor Forward Main Motor Reverse Quenching Lamp Toner Supply Motor Forward Fan Motor High Fan Motor Low Registration Clutch By pass Feed Clutch Upper Feed Clutch Lower Feed Clutch BK Low Lift Motor Up BK Low Lift Motor Down Relay Clutch BK Relay Clutch BK Upper Feed Clutch BK Lower Feed Clutch BK Lift Motor BK Up Lift Motor Up BK Up Lift Motor Down Duplex Inv Motor Reverse Duplex Inv Motor Forward Duplex Trans Motor Duplex Gate Solenoid D
37. In all modes ID gamma correction can be adjusted with SP4 923 1 December 2003 IMAGE PROCESSING Gradation Processing Overview There are three types of gradation processing listed below Refer to the Default Image Processing Mode for Each Original Type section for more details on which processes are used for each original mode e Binary picture processing e Error diffusion e Dithering Binary Picture Processing The 8 bit image data is converted into 1 bit data black and white image data This is done when the user selects Text 2 or Special 1 The threshold for deciding whether a pixel is black or white cannot be adjusted Error Diffusion Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a halftone image Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the surrounding pixels The corrected pixels are compared with an error diffusion matrix Error diffusion is applied when the user selects Text 1 Photo 1 3 and Special 2 and 5 As the final step in error diffusion a process called Texture Removal is applied to Text 1 Photo 2 Special 2 and Special 5 by default but can also be applied to Photo 1 and 3 by changing the value of SP4 926 Texture removal uses 256 threshold values in an 8 x 8 matrix The value of SP4 926 controls the application of Texture Removal for each of the 6 modes listed above The settings are as follows 2 Os S I 32 as 0
38. North America Europe A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm A3 LEF 420 x 297 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm BA LEF 364 x 257 mm A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm A6 LEF 148 x 105 mm DLT SEF 11 x 17 DLT LEF 17 x 11 LG SEF 81 2 x 14 LGLEF 14 x 81 2 Gov LG SEF 81 4 x 14 Gov LG LEF 14 x 81 4 EO S S O S O S O O O O X O X 3 X X O x O Xx O XX O Z O X OXI O O O O Z O S S X Z O Z OZ O x O Z O Z O S O O O O x O Z Z X x O Z O Xx O x S O Z O Z O S O O O O X O 3 3 X X O Z O O O x x OI XI OI X O X O OI O O X gt lt gt lt gt lt x x O X O Xx LT SEF 81 2 x 11 LT LEF 11 x 81 2 HLT SEF 51 2 x 81 2 HLT LEF 81 2 x 51 2 SIGN X Detected Main frame tray Processed Duplex O Not detected Main frame tray Not processed Duplex M Selected manually K Specified from the key pad NOTE Custom W 90 to 297 mm L 148 to 600 mm SPEC 8 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS Continued Main frame tray Paper Size W x L North America Europe Executive SEF 71 4 x 101 2 M M M M X Executive LEF 101 2 x 71
39. Time is added on each line of logs bit 1 Millisecond Millisecond is added to time bit 2 Colored Text and background is colored bit 3 Return code The return code is added at line ends bit 4 Indentation Text data is indented bit 5 Not used bit 6 Not used bit 7 Not used Specifies the DCS IFC module debug output bit 0 Client event transfer log bit 1 UCS event transfer log bit 2 DCS internal event inter module event in DCS transfer log bit 3 Parameter data bit 4 Process flow log bit 5 Detailed process flow log bit 6 Not used bit 7 Not used Specifies the DCS SMM module debug output bit 0 SCS event transfer log bit 1 DCS internal event inter module event in DCS transfer log bit 2 Parameter data bit 3 Process flow log bit 4 Detailed process flow log bit 5 SP read write related event transfer log bit 6 SP read write related event parameter log bit 7 Not used SJM RJM Specifies the DCS SJM RJM module debug output bit 0 SJM IFC DSS event transfer log bit 1 SJM Parameter data bit 2 SJM Process flow log bit 3 SJM Detailed process flow log bit 4 SJM MCS event RPC log bit 5 RJM Event transfer log bit 6 RJM Parameter data bit 7 RJM Process flow check Specifies the DCS DSS module debug output bit 0 DCS internal event inter module event in DCS transfer log bit 1 MCS NAS internal module event log bit 2 Parameter data bit 3 Time
40. adjust the image quality 3 6 7 PCU SECTION 1 December 2003 3 6 3 OPC DRUM A E ru B121R972 WMF B121R971 WMF PCU er 3 6 1 Front side piece A 2 x 1 Rear side piece B 2 x 2 1 coupling Separate the drum section C from the developer section D NOTE To ensure that the left side gears line up keep the drum cover E closed when reinserting the front side piece Pry out the drum retaining clip F NOTE When reassembling install the clip in the same orientation with the lip facing away from the drum shaft 6 OPC drum G When reassembling adjust the image quality 3 6 7 1 December 2003 PCU SECTION 3 6 4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING BRUSH po e m 3 6 5 CLEANING BLADE Reassembling When reassembling adjust the B B121R973 WMF te 96 os O0 55 9 lt 474 OPC Drum 3 6 3 Holding pin A Stepped screw B Charge roller C and cleaning brush D with the holders and springs NOTE Turn the gear E as necessary so that the rear holder F comes out When reassembling adjust the image quality 3 6 7 Drum charge roller 3 6 4 Cleaning blade A x 2 image quality er 3 6 7 When replacing the cleaning blade apply B121R974 WMF toner to the edge of the new cleaning blade This prevents possible damage to the OPC drum and blade 2229 1 2 After installing the cleaning blade remove some of the
41. error The laser writing signal F GATE fails to turn Low after the laser crosses 5 mm on the drum surface from the laser writing start position e BICU board defective e The fax controller or printer controller has a poor connection e Fax controller or printer controller defective Laser synchronization error The main scan synchronization detector board cannot detect the laser synchronization signal for more than 5 consecutive 100 ms intervals e Poor connection between the LD unit and the BICU board e Damaged cable between BICU and LD unit e LD unit out of position e LD unit defective e BICU board defective TD sensor error The TD sensor outputs less than 0 2 V or more than 4 0 V 10 times consecutively during copying e TD sensor abnormal e Poor connection of the PCU Development bias leak A development bias leak signal is detected 4 3 e Poor connection of the PCU e High voltage supply board defective SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS No Definition Symptom 1 December 2003 Possible Cause 392 B TD sensor initial setting error TD sensor initial setting is not performed correctly e D sensor defective e No developer e Drum does not turn e Development roller does not turn e Poor connection of the PCU e The voltage is not applied to charge roller Transfer roller leak error 1 A current leak signal for the transfer roller is detected
42. 0 9 0 3 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1 2 mm Left side 0 0 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 1 5 mm Adjusts the left edge erase margin The rear left edge is this value plus 0 3 mm Right side 0 0 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm Adjusts the right edge erase margin The rear right edge is this value plus 0 3 mm Development Bias Adjustment Printing 1500 200 650 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller when printing This can be adjusted as a temporary measure if faint copies are being produced due to an aging drum ID sensor pattern 2 LL 220 V 1 L 260 V 0 N 300 V 1 H 340 V 2 HH 380 V Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller when generating the ID sensor pattern The actual voltage applied is this setting plus the value of SP2 201 1 The setting affects ID sensor pattern density which in turn affects the toner supply Outputs after Near End 0 50 pages 1 20 pages Sets the number of copy print fax pages that can be made after toner near end has been detected Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image ratio Developer Initialization Initializes both the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and
43. 0 5 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for the rear side of duplex originals for ADF mode Use the 62 key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment Sub scan Magnif 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjust the sub scan magnification for the ADF ADF Adjustment Original Curl Adj 0 No 1 Yes Enables or disables the skew adjustment for the reverse sides of originals When you enable SP6 006 6 adjust the distance of the skew adjustment SP6 006 7 6009 ADF Adjustment Skew Correction 20 20 0 1 mm step Specifies the distance of the skew adjustment SP6 006 7 is effective when you enable SP6 006 6 ADF Adjustment Original Curl Adj ADF Free Run 6009 1 6901 Performs an ADF free run Press ON to start press OFF to stop Display ADF APS 6901 1 Displays the status of the ADF original size sensors 5 1 17 ADF Shading Time 0 60 10 1 s step Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ADF mode Light and heat in the room may affect the scanner response Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs 5 19 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP7 XXX Data Log 7001 Total Operation 7001 1 Displays the total operation time total drum rotation time 7401 Counter SC Total 0 9999 0 1 step 7401 1 Displays
44. 1 OVERVIEW 2nd Mirror Exposure Lamp 1st Mirror Exposure Glass Original Width Sensors Original Length Sensors Lens Block SBU Exit Sensor Scanner Motor Inverter Roller Duplex Inverter Sensor Duplex Entrance Sensor Hot Roller Upper Transport Roller Pressure Roller OPC Drum Middle Transport Roller Duplex Exit Sensor Image Density Sensor O ROON mono cs ox cxx a a lx olx o lx 6 2 21 22 23 24 1 December 2003 Registration Roller Registration Sensor By pass Tray Lower Transport Roller 25 26 2T 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Upper Relay Roller Relay Sensor Lower Relay Roller Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Feed Roller Paper End Sensor Bottom Plate PCU Development Roller WTL Polygon Mirror Motor Laser Unit Toner Supply Bottle Holder Exit Roller 3rd Mirror Scanner H P Sensor 1 December 2003 OVERVIEW 6 1 2 PAPER PATH B121D924 WMF o LE Sr 8 3 3 a The B123 model has a duplex unit mounted on the right side of the machine All models have a by pass tray 6 3 OVERVIEW 1 December 2003 6 1 3 DRIVE LAYOUT B121D925 WMF 7 6 B121D926 WMF 1 Scanner Motor 6 Relay Clutch 2 Main Motor 7 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 3 Hot Roller 8 By pass Feed Clutch 4 OPC Drum 9 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 5 Development Roller 10 Registration Clutch
45. 1 Place 10 sheets of new A4 LTR paper sideways LEF or new A3 DLT paper on the exposure glass and close the platen cover or the ADF 2 Enter SP4 428 001 and select 1 YES The machine automatically adjusts the standard white density COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING 1 December 2003 3 13 3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT Registration and Blank Margin A B A Leading edge registration B Side to side registration B121R509 WMF B121R510 WMF NOTE Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3 11 x 17 paper 1 Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the registrations and adjust as necessary using the appropriate SP modes as follows SP mode Side to side registration SP6 006 1 Leading edge registration SP6 006 2 Blank margin for the trailing edge SP6 006 3 Side to side registration Duplex rear SP6 006 4 Sub scan Magnification 17 A Sub scan magnification B121R511 WMF NOTE Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3 11 x 17 paper 1 Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the registration and if necessary adjust it using SP6 006 005 The specification is 1 0 3 56 1 December 2003 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4 1 1 SUMMARY There are four levels of service call conditions Definition Reset Procedure
46. 1 5 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the strips of tape B3871151 WMF 1 December 2003 ADF INSTALLATION 2 Remove the left scale A amp x 2 3 Place the DF exposure glass B on the glass holder Make sure that the white mark C is on the bottom at the front end 2 15 T 8 S 4 Peel off the backing D of the double sided tape attached to lt 2 2271 the rear side of the scale guide SS E then install the scale guide amp x 2 removed in step 2 Install the two stud screws F 6 Mount the ADF on the copier then slide it to the front 7 Secure the ADF unit with the fixing screws G 8 Connect the cable H to the copier 9 Attach the appropriate scale decal I as shown B3871501 WMF ADF INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 10 Attach an attention decal A to the top cover NOTE The attention decals in the package are written in different languages 11 Turn the main power switch on Then check if the document feeder works properly B3871903 WMF 12 Make a full size copy and check that the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the side to side and leading edge registrations er 3 13 3 1 December 2003 TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 6 TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Chec
47. 1 December 2003 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT PCU 6 7 2 DRIVE B121D937 WMF The main motor A drives the drum B through a series of gears and the drum drive shaft C The main motor assembly includes a drive controller which outputs a motor lock signal when the rotation speed is out of the specified range o LE Ss 59 3 6 33 DRUM CHARGE 1 December 2003 6 8 DRUM CHARGE 6 8 1 OVERVIEW B121D938 WMF This copier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum The drum charge roller A always contacts the surface of the drum B to give it a negative charge of 950 V The high voltage supply board gives a negative charge of 1700 V to the drum charge roller through the screw C and terminal plate D This voltage can be changed using SP2 001 1 1 December 2003 DRUM CHARGE 6 8 2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION Correction for Environmental Conditions 4 0 cm ID Sensor Pattern Charge Voltage On Laser Diode Off FEE AX E E Drum Potential 950 V 650 V Development Bias 600 V 350 V 150 V ID Sensor Output Vsg 4 00 V Vsdp 3 70 V tt E L Vsp 0 50 V t B121D940 WMF o Xs Ss 59 3 With drum charge roller system the voltage transferred from roller to drum varies with the temperature and humidity around the drum charge roller The higher the temperature or humidity is the higher the applied vo
48. 10 Special 5 Scanner Gamma Selects text or photo as the priority output mode This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 6 5 4 IPU Scanner Gamma Copy 0 5 default 1 Text 2 Photo Notch Selection 6 5 4 Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs Normally the center notch is 3 range 1 5 If 1 is selected each notch shifts down becomes lighter If 1 is selected each notch shifts up becomes darker e This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4 921 Notch Selection Copy 71 Light 0 Normal 1 Dark Texture Removal 6 5 4 Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion 0 The default value for each mode is used Text 1 Photo 2 Special 2 and Special 5 have a default of 3 and Photo 1 3 have a default of 1 1 No removal applied 2 5 Removal applied at the level specified here The higher the setting level the less clear the image will become more texture removal This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 Texture Removal Copy 0 6 0 1 step 5 14 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Line Width Correction Adjusts the line width correction algorithm Positive settings produce thicker lines negative settings produce thinner lines This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 wr 6 5 4 Line
49. 10 3 1 mm step Optional Tray Adj Adjusts the reverse time for the upper and lower paper lift motors 1st optional 2 2 0 1 step 2nd optional Detailed Descriptions Optional Paper Tray Unit By pass Envelope 0 Disabled 12 Enabled The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program SP1 911 001 and you select Thick Paper as the paper type of the by pass tray gt System Settings gt Tray Paper Settings gt Paper Type Bypass Tray 5 5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP2 XXX Drum Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Printing 2100 1500 1700 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when printing The actually applied voltage changes automatically as charge roller voltage correction is carried out The value you set here becomes the base value on which this correction is carried out ID sensor pattern 0 400 300 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when generating the Vsdp ID sensor pattern as part of charge roller voltage correction The actual charge roller voltage is obtained by adding this value to the value of SP2 001 1 Erase Margin Adjustment Leading edge 0 0 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 1 5 mm Adjusts the leading edge erase margin Trailing 0 0 9 0 3 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm Adjus
50. 6 4 1 December 2003 BOARD STRUCTURE 6 2 BOARD STRUCTURE 6 2 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM TUS GW Controller Board Fax Unit Lamp SBU LD Unit LSD H Thermistor Panel High Voltage P P BICU ADF ARDF Paper Tray Unit Clutches Duplex See Note Polygon Motor One Bin Tray o LE SE 3 3 a Lamp Stabilizer Sensors Standard Option B121D905 WMF NOTE 1 Only B123 models contain the duplex unit 2 The one bin tray is for B122 B123 with the optional controller box 6 5 BOARD STRUCTURE 1 December 2003 1 BICU Base Engine and Image Control Unit The main board controls the following functions e Engine sequence e Timing control for peripherals e Image processing video control e Operation control system control Basic machine only e Machine control e Drive control for the sensors motors and clutches of the printer and scanner e High voltage supply board control e Serial interfaces with peripherals e Fusing control 2 SBU Sensor Board Unit The SBU deals with the analog signals from the CCD and converts them into digital signals 6 6 1 December 2003 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW 6 3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW B121D907 WMF o LE Ss 3 3 B121D927 WMF 1 EXPOSURE A xenon lamp exposes the original Light reflected from the original passes to the CCD
51. 7 22 PAPER FEED AND EXIT nelle ences SPEC 8 Main Frame DUDlIGX rii iot ertt SPEC 8 Optional Paper Tray One Bin Tray By pass Tray SPEC 10 3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION eerie nennen nnn SPEC 12 4 OPTIONAL 2 SPEC 15 PASE ur AS Ema SPEC 15 EI LEM SPEC 16 ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY 22 SPEC 17 TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY SPEC 18 One BiN Tray Acer SPEC 18 1 December 2003 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 INSTALLATION NCAUTION Before installing options please do the following c 2 15 T 8 S 1 Ifthere is a fax unit in the machine print out all messages stored in the memory the lists of user programmed items and the system parameter list If there is a printer option in the machine print out all data in the printer buffer Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord the telephone line and the network cable 1 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 ENVIRONMENT Temperature and Humidity Chart Humidity 80 L Operation range 1590 Temperature 10 C 27 C 32 C 50 F 80 6 F 89 6 F B1211920 WMF 1 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 December 2003 1 Temperature Range 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 89 6 F 2 Humidity Rang
52. 7 8 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 1 December 2003 6 13 6 OVERHEAT PROTECTION This machine protects its hardware from overheat by three features Normally the first feature can fully protect the hardware The second feature works as the fail safe feature for the first one The third feature works as the fail safe feature for the second one FiRST FEATURE If the fusing temperature reaches 230 C or higher and stays so for one second the controller turns the fusing lamp off In a case like this SC543 or SC553 is displayed SECOND FEATURE If the fusing feature reaches 250 C the controller cuts off the 24V line The fusing lamps are on the 24V line THIRD FEATURE Two thermostats are attached on each line of the two fusing lamps four thermostats in total One of the two thermostats cuts the power supply to the fusing lamp at 179 C and the other cuts the power supply at 180 C Note that the thermostat temperature is somewhat lower than the fusing temperature 1 December 2003 DUPLEX UNIT 6 14 DUPLEX UNIT 6 14 1 OVERALL 1 2 8 3 7 Sop IS 6 B121D912 WMF The printed page from the fusing unit goes straight through to the exit tray or upward to the inverter section depending on the position of the junction gate If the user selects duplex mode the page is directed to the inverter tray then reversed through the duplex unit and back into the machine for printing the second side 2
53. C through a train of gears and the development drive shaft D When the PCU is pushed in the development drive shaft engages the development roller gear The development drive gears except for the gears in the development unit are helical gears These gears are quieter than normal gears B121D943 WMF 6 9 3 DEVELOPER MIXING The two mixing augers E F H G keep the developer evenly mixed Mixing auger 2 E transports excess developer scraped off the development roller G by the doctor blade H towards the front of the machine Mixing auger 1 F returns the excess developer F along with new toner to the rear of the mixing assembly Here the developer is reapplied to the development roller Lg SSS E o LE Q Ss 3 3 B121D944 WMF 6 39 DEVELOPMENT 1 December 2003 6 9 4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS B121D945 WMF This machine uses a negative positive development system in which black areas of the latent image are at a low negative charge about 154 50 V and white areas are at a high negative charge about 950 V To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the drum the high voltage supply board applies a bias of 650 volts to the development rollers throughout the image development process The bias is applied to the development roller shaft A through the drive shaft B The development bias voltage 650 V can be adj
54. Close the front cover B 14 Install the exit tray C as follows D Keep the front end higher than the rear end Push the left hook into the opening in the copier 8 Push the right hook into the opening in the copier 15 Pull the support D out of the left end of the exit tray 16 Insert the support into the left end of the paper exit tray E of the copier 17 Turn the main switch on 18 Check the operation 1 24 1 December 2003 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION 1 9 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure c 2 S T 8 C B1211127 WMF Remove the exposure glass 3 4 1 Remove the left cover er 3 3 8 Pass the connector A through the opening B Install the anti condensation heater C as shown Join the connectors A D Clamp the harness with the clamp E QE TON um oneris Reinstall the left cover and exposure glass 1 25 TRAY HEATERS 1 December 2003 1 10 TRAY HEATERS NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 10 1 UPPER TRAY HEATER 1 Remove the 1st tray cassette A 2 Remove the rear cover 1 12 B1211020 WMF 3 Pass the connector B through the opening C and install the tray heater D 2 x 1 4 Install the relay cable E 5 Fixthe cable with the clamp F 6 Reinstall the 1st
55. Displays the print count of the AS DLT size and larger paper 8411 Prints Duplex 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8411 1 Displays the total count of the duplex printing 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE T PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages processed for printing This is the total for all application programs 8421 1 Simplex Duplex 84212 Duplex Duplex 8421 3 Book Duplex 84214 Simplex Combine 84215 Duplex Combine 8421 6 2 8421 7 4 84218 6 8421 9 8 gt 8421 10 9 gt 8421 11 16 gt 8421 12 Booklet 8421 13 Magazine C PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages processed for printing by the copier application program 8422 1 Simplex Duplex 84222 Duplex Duplex 8422 3 Book Duplex 84224 Simplex Combine 8422 5 Duplex Combine 8422 6 2 8422 7 4 gt 8422 8 6 gt 8422 9 8 gt 8422 10 9 gt 8422 11 16 gt 8422 12 Booklet 8422 13 Magazine F PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages processed for printing by the fax application program 8423 1 Simplex gt Duplex 8423 2 Duplex gt Duplex 8423 3 Book gt Duplex 8
56. Enabled Enables or disables remote diagnosis via the NRS network 5816 6 Device Information Call Display 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Determines whether the device information call NRS is displayed 5816 7 SSL Disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Determines whether the SSL sends the remote communication gate confirmation 5816 8 RCG Connect Timeout 1 90 10 1 second step Sets the timer for the remote communication gate connection NRS 5816 9 RCG Write to Timeout 0 100 60 1 second step Sets the timer for writing data to the remote communication gate NRS 5816 10 RCG Read Timeout 0 100 60 1 second step Sets the timer for reading data from the remote communication gate NRS 5816 11 Port 80 Enable Determines whether permission is granted for access to the SOP via Port 80 NRS 5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only 5821 1 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code After changing this setting you must switch the machine off and on 5821 2 RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG Remote Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service center 00000000h FFFFFFFFh 00000000h 5824 NVRAM Upload 58241 5 1 11 5825 NVRAM Download 5 1 11 5828 Network Setting 5828 74 Delete Password Deletes the NCS Network Control Service password Sets the Telnet WS
57. Gea leta DR ces ls ee ER UR UC HERR NAR 6 21 Auto image density 5 4 404 6 22 Scanner Gamma y Correction eese 6 23 Main Scan MagnifiCaliORi 6 24 Mirroring for ADF Mode 6 24 guum CD n 6 25 ID Gamma y COrrection 6 26 Gradation 22 22 oe roseo te rove hore Ecce 6 27 6 5 4 VIDEO CONTROL UNIT VCU eee 6 28 Fine Character and Image 04 4 1 6 28 Printer 6 28 6 0 TEASER EXPOSURE cots chats tts oats hl as teet 6 29 6 0 1 OVERVIEW ES aeuo chuc aene ete teed a 6 29 6 6 2 AUTO POWER CONTROL 6 30 66 3 ED SABETY n 54246 25 cedet eee oe pete ests oe ceo tette 6 31 6 7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT 20 20220 0 0 6 32 BJ T OVERVIEW SA ttc LAC 6 32 De DISIVE cect eit i tite 6 33 6 8 DRUM CHARGE cs uasa s MN 6 34 6 8 1 OVERVIEW 2 tre ooo tasto donet Aas eet ett aed d 6 34 6 8 2 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION 6 35 Correction for Environmental 6 35 6 8 3 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION T
58. Grayscales with White Lines Vertical A4 Gradation Patches 1 128 Grades Grayscales with White Lines Vertical Horizontal Test Patterns Using SBU Pattern Grid Pattern double dot Gray scale 1 256 grades Gray scale 2 256 grades 5 85 4 Gradation Patches 2 128 Grades Trimming Area A4 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5 1 14 COUNTER EACH PAPER JAM SP7 504 The table lists the menu numbers the last three digits of SP7 504 XXX and the paper jam timings and locations Paper jam occurs at power on Paper does not reach the registration sensor from a paper tray Paper does not reach the relay sensor Paper is caught at the relay sensor Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor in the optional paper feed unit Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor in the optional paper feed unit Paper does not reach the registration sensor from the by pass tray Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse side printing for duplex printing Paper is caught at the registration sensor Paper is caught at the exit sensor previous page Paper does not reach the exit sensor Paper is caught at the exit sensor Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor from the registration roller Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor
59. IPU also checks the image density of all dots If a succession of low density dots is detected the machine interprets this as a low ID line and applies the MTF filter for low ID lines using the value set in SP4 932 The higher the setting the sharper the image However this is only used when the customer uses Text 1 Text 2 Photo 2 Special 1 Special 2 or Special 5 The default value is 0 for each mode However the actual strength of O differs from mode to mode 2 Os Scr 8 3 as IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 Independent Dot Erase When the user selects Text 1 and 2 Photo 2 and Special 1 2 and 5 modes independent dots are detected using a matrix and erased from the image The detection level can be adjusted with SP4 928 The higher setting the greater number of dots the machine will erase The machine erases the dots regardless of their image density However note that dots in mesh like images may be mistakenly detected as independent dots Line Width Correction When the user selects Text 1 and 2 Photo 2 Special 1 2 and 5 the thickness of lines is adjusted using the setting of SP4 927 Note that the default for all modes except Special 2 is OFF Line width correction is done by the IPU SCRATCH chip ID Gamma 5 Correction The machine automatically selects the most appropriate ID gamma correction based on the selected original type and the operation panel ID setting
60. IRM 1394a Check Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM OFF Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a ON After IRM is checked if IRM does not conform then independent node switches to IRM 5839 10 Unique ID Lists the ID Node Unique ID assigned to the device by the system administrator OFF Does list the Node Unique ID assigned by the system administrator Instead the Source ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used ON The Node Unique ID assigned by the system administrator is used and the Source ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored Also when the serial bus is reset extra bus transactions are opened for enumeration 5839 11 Logout Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP 2 1bit OFF Disable refuse login Initiator retry during login Login refusal on arrival of login request standard operation ON Enable force logout Initiator retry during login Login refusal on arrival of login request and the initiator forces the login 5839 12 Login Enables or disables the exclusive login feature SBP 2 related OFF Disables The exclusive login LOGIN ORB exClusvie it is ignored ON Enables Exclusive login is in effect 5839 13 Login MAX 0 63 8 1 0 and 63 Reserved Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator 6 bits 5 46 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5840
61. LE Ss 3 3 If the copy is made with the platen fully open the CPU decides the original size from the sensor outputs when the Start key is pressed SCANNING 1 December 2003 B121D931 WMF Original Size Length Sensors Width Sensors SP4 301 AAIA3 L2 w2 wi display version version 11110000 A3 11 x 17 B4 8 5 x 14 11010000 8 5 x 13 11000000 A4 SEF 8 5 x 19 01000000 A4 LEF 11 x 8 5 00110000 B5 LEF 8 5 x 11 00010000 AS LEF 8 5 x 5 5 00000000 01010000 8 5 x 19 ololololol ololo 3 alo NOTE 0 High paper 1 Low paper present The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre scan and increases the machine s productivity For other combinations Cannot Detect Original Size will be indicated on the operation panel display if SP4 303 is kept at the default setting However if the by pass feeder is used note that the machine assumes that the copy paper is short edge first For example if A4 paper is placed long edge first on the by pass tray the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans the full A3 area for the first copy of each page of the original disregarding the original size sensors However for each page the data signal to the laser diode is stopped to match the
62. LT 6 69 Up to A4 Short edge LT 6 70 6 14 4 FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM 6 71 6 15 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC 6 72 CIVENRVIGW is CURE 6 72 BOE LL Eni ie lenia ins 6 72 nU DLE o n RUD PER CR EDO E 6 73 esl M M Mr nih 6 73 6 16 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES 6 74 ui SE EA opa Gc oT br Scene Etui bas 6 74 BORSE ce DE E EE Deo De MR ee ES SIC eh 6 74 6 75 FRECOVELY A IS 6 75 PERIPHERALS ONE BIN TRAY B621 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B621 1 1 1 TRAY OPEN SWEROH nnde ttis B621 1 T2 PAPER SENSOR 45r DR DR DETUR IR ES beh B621 3 des EMU SENSOR weil E eren Ru B621 3 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION cine u acusa B621 4 2 1 COMPONENTS 5 be leeds B621 4 22 9E T PINGSS ee bes tos eel Et Co Ee Seek aet a En ra tu B621 5 Stings REO AM E B621 5 thv rd e ERA EUR QU RAE Te CURIAE CRT eras Sees E B621 5 2 3 PAPER TRANSPOR
63. Near End 6 48 Toner Near End Recovery ee tete stetit 6 48 Toner End Detector chet cantik tae CER DRE Loa 6 48 Toner End Recovery 5252 2 vos ono Dio Sca d Conto 6 48 6 10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER 2 000 6 49 DRUM CLEANING so ere 6 49 6 10 2 TONER RECYCLING id dnd ind c nr Re Ro ia et 6 49 B TT PAPER FEED ctt ehe etate t e 6 50 KNEES Iria TTE 6 50 6 11 2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM 6 51 6 11 3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM 6 51 6 11 4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM esses 6 52 6 1125 PAPER END DETECTION oe odes 6 52 6 11 6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION e PH rt EP 6 53 Paper a odere cu aed qu Se S equ D vun A neta Rr o aUo 6 53 BYPASS MAY ces IDEA DIU LA DIU ta td pi Mt i e oi ta 6 54 eid Maux Rn 6 55 4150 PAPER REOR TRATION sus tetitont ou piae unda 6 55 6 12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER 6 56 0 121 OVERVIEW dena eed bend p ae te aene tu ap eoe pu bent Guten 6 56 6 12 2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING 6 57 6 12 3 TRANSFER
64. Open indicator is not lit even if doors are open Main 3 Open The machine does not turn on Shorted The machine does not turn off Shorted Right Door Open Shorted Front Right Cover Open Shorted 4 3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS Fuse 120V i era 240 V Symptom when turning on the main switch Power Supply Board 1SA125V_ Normspme o 6 8A 250V 3 15 250V 1A 125V 4A 250V Anti condensation Tray Heater does not turn on 4412507 4 250 4AI250V 4 250 4A 250V 4A 250V SC901 is displayed AAI250V 4A 250V Optional peripherals are detected but do not function 3 5 50 3 18A 280V 4 14 1 December 2003 4 4 LED DISPLAY 4 4 1 BICU Number Function Monitors the 5 V line for the CPU and the surrounding LED 1 circuit Usually this LED is blinking 4 15 LED DISPLAY 1 2 a 5 2 c 5 9 7 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 SERVICE TABLES 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Do not let the user access the SP mode Only service representatives but no other persons are allowed to access the SP mode The machine quality or its operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than service representatives accesses the SP mode 5 1 1 USING SP MODE The following two modes are available e SP Mode Service Program Mode The SP Mode includes the programs that are necessary for standard m
65. SC codes and the number of their occurrences Each number is in the range of 0 to 9999 5 22 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Dsply Info Count Displays the total operating time or the total number of operations The time is displayed in the following format day hour minute second Dsply Info Count Dsply Timer Count The total of the time when the main switch is kept on excluding the time when the safety switch is off er 6 6 3 Dsply Info Count Dsply APS Working The total of the time when the APS is working Dsply Info Count Dsply ID S Work The total of the time when the ID sensor is working Dsply Info Count Dsply Dev Counter The total number of paper outputs Dsply Info Count Dsply ID Er Count The total number of ID sensor errors Reset Info Count Reset Info Count Reset Timer Count Clears the counter of SP7 991 1 Reset Info Count Reset ID Er Count Clears the counter of SP7 991 5 5 23 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP8 XXX History C Total Scan PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of scanned originals The both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original fed from the ADF are scanned ADF Org Feed 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step ADF Org Feed Front Displays the total number of scanned front sides of originals fed from the ADF ADF Org Feed Back Displays the total
66. SERVICE PROGRAM MODE CC Call 5508 1 Jam Remains 0 Disable 1 Enable Enables disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam 5508 2 Continuous Jams 0 Disable 1 Enable Enables disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams 5508 3 Continuous Door Open 0 Disable 1 Enable Enables disables initiating a call when the front door remains open 5508 4 Low Call Mode 0 Normal mode 1 Reduced mode Enables disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of calls 5508 11 Jam Detection Time Length 03 530 10 1 Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 5508 12 Jam Detection Continuous 02 10 5 1 Count Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 5508 13 Door Open Time Length 03 530 10 1 Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 5508 21 CC Call Long Time Jam 0 Auto call 1 Alarm Selects the machine reaction to long time jams 5508 22 CC Call Continuous Jam 0 Auto call 1 Alarm Selects the machine reaction to continuous jams 5508 23 5801 CC Call Door Open 0 Auto call 1 Al
67. Specify the pattern number and press the OK key 2 Press the copy start key The copy mode is activated Activating Copy Mode in section 5 1 1 Specify copy settings and press the key To return to the SP mode press the key Test Patterns Test Patterns Using VCU Test Patterns Using IPU 2 Pattern Pattern No print Vertical Lines Single Dot Vertical Lines Single Dot Horizontal Lines Single Dot Horizontal Lines Single Dot Vertical Lines Double Dot Vertical Lines Double Dot Horizontal Lines Double Dot Horizontal Lines Double Dot Isolated Four Dots Grid Pattern Single Dot Grid Pattern Double Dot Grid Pattern Double Dot Black Band Vertical 1024 Dots Alternating Dot Pattern Grayscales Horizontal 512 Dots CO N BY IN Isolated one dot Grayscales Vertical 256 Dots Black Band Horizontal ID Patch Trimming Area Cross Argyle Pattern Single Dot Argyle Pattern 128 Dot Pitch Grayscales Horizontal Square Gradation 64 Grades Grayscales Vertical Square Gradation 256 Grades Grayscales Vertical Horizontal Grayscales Horizontal 32 Dot Width Grayscales Vertical Horizontal Overlay Grayscales Vertical 32 Dot Width Grayscales With White Lines Horizontal Trimming Area A3
68. The following keys are used e Asterisk The settings are saved in the NVRAM Most of them return to the default values when you execute SP5 998 001 Engine and SP5 801 001 All Clear 5 1 7 e DFU The menu is for the design factory use only You must not change the settings e Brackets The brackets enclose the setting rage default value and minimum step with unit as follows Minimum Maximum Default Step SP1 XXX Feed Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the printing leading edge registration from paper trays All Trays 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 By pass Duplex Side to Side Registration Adjusts the printing side to side registration from each paper feed station using the Trimming Area Pattern SP5 902 No 10 Adjustments are supported for all 4 possible feed trays including optional trays e The SP1 002 1 setting is applied to all trays not just the 1st tray Settings for trays 2 to 4 are offsets relative to the SP1 002 1 setting e For duplex copies the value for the front side is determined by SP1 002 1 to 4 and the value for the rear side is determined by SP1 002 6 1st tray 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 2nd tray 3rd tray 4th tray By pass Duplex Paper Feed Timing Adjusts the amount of buckle the paper feed clutch applies to the paper after the registration sensor is activated A higher setting applies greater buckling
69. To prevent damage to the machine the main Enter SP mode and then turn machine cannot be operated until the SC has the main power switch off and been reset by a service representative see the on note below If the SC was caused by incorrect sensor Turn the main power switch off detection the SC can be reset by turning the and on main power switch off and on The main machine can be operated as usual Turn the main power switch off excluding the unit related to the service call and on The SC history is updated The machine can be The SC will not be displayed operated as usual Only the SC history is updated ss 50 58 Fw NOTE 1 If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs 2 If the problem concerns a motor lock first check the mechanical load before replacing motors or sensors SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4 1 2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS No Definition Symptom 1 December 2003 Possible Cause 101 B Exposure Lamp Error The standard white level was not detected properly when scanning the white plate e Exposure lamp defective e Exposure lamp stabilizer defective e Exposure lamp connector defective e Dirty scanner mirror or scanner mirror out of position e SBU board defective e SBU connector defective e Lens block out of position e Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning
70. about 1 kV to the transfer roller Any negatively charged toner on the transfer roller is then transferred back to the drum Then a positive cleaning current 10 uA is applied to the transfer roller to push back to the drum any positively charged toner on the transfer roller The machine goes through the cleaning mode in the following conditions e Before starting the printing job only if enabled with SP2 996 note that the default setting is off e Just after the power is switched on e After a copy jam has been cleared e After 10 or more sheets of paper have been copied and the copy job has finished Also the transfer roller cleaning current can be adjusted using SP2 301 4 6 12 4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM A B121D966 WMF B121D965 WMF The discharge plate A and the drum curvature of the drum help the paper to separate away from the drum The discharge plate is grounded 1 December 2003 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 6 13 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 6 13 1 OVERVIEW OO eI Is Paper exit roller Exit sensor Hot roller strippers Pressure roller Cleaning roller Pressure spring B121D901 WMF 7 Fusing lamps 8 Thermistor 9 Thermostat 10 Hot roller 11 Thermostat o LE Sr 8 3 3 a IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 1 December 2003 6 13 2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM E F G H B121D903 WMF Fusing Unit Drive The main m
71. adjustment 4901 6 White Result 0 511 0 1 step Displays the result of the white level adjustment 4901 8 White Display Error 0 Normal 1 Error Displays the return code of the white level adjustment When an error is detected SC143 is generated White Display Overflow 0 Normal 1 Error Displays a return code of the white level adjustment The code 1 error is returned if the adjustment result is not in the range of the values in SP4 901 6 5 36 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 4901 10 White Number of Attempt 0 20 0 1 step Displays how many times the white level adjustment is retried The value does not include the first execution of the white adjustment For example if the value is 2 this indicates that the white level adjustment has been executed three times The white level adjustment can be executed 20 times or less Therefore if the value is 20 this indicates that the white level adjustment has ended abnormally as described the value 20 does not include the first execution If the white level adjustment is unsuccessful the machine uses the result of the latest successful white level adjustment 4901 11 Auto Adjustment Setting 222 281 256 1 step Displays the parameter of the white level adjustment The value is based on the result of SP4 901 12 4901 12 Auto Adjustment Result 0 600 0 1 step Displays
72. after replacing the developer During TD sensor initial setting the TD sensor is set so that the TD sensor output is the value of SP2 926 default 2 4 V This value will be used as the standard reference voltage Vts of the TD sensor Toner Concentration Measurement The toner concentration in the developer is detected once every copy cycle The sensor output voltage Vt during the detection cycle is compared with the standard reference voltage Vts or the toner supply reference voltage Vref Vsp Vsg Detection The ID sensor detects the following voltages e Vsg The ID sensor output when checking the drum surface e Vsp The ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern In this way the reflectivity of both the drum surface and the pattern on the drum are checked compensating for any variations in the reflectivity of the pattern on the drum or the reflectivity of the drum surface The ID sensor pattern is made on the drum by the charge roller and laser diode Vsp Vsg is not detected every page or job it is detected at the following times to decide Vref e During warm up at power on e f the machine starts warming up when the fusing temperature is 30 C or less default after entering night mode or low power mode SP2 994 specifies the temperature setting o Ss 59 3 Toner Supply Reference Voltage Vref Determination The toner supply reference voltage Vref is used for toner su
73. all messages stored in the memory e Print out the lists of user programmed items e Print out the system parameter list e Disconnect the telephone line If the optional printer unit is installed e Print out all data in the printer buffer e Disconnect the network cable Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the strips of tape Make sure that you have removed all the strips of tape and all the pieces of cardboard B3851159 WMF ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 2 Remove the cover A 1 rivet B3851901 WMF CAUTION Before placing the copier on the paper tray unit make sure that the harness B is safe The paper tray unit does not function properly if the harness is damaged 3 Set the copier on the paper tray unit 4 One tray copier model B121 Remove the 1st tray cassette C Two tray copier models B122 B123 Remove the 2nd tray cassette C B3851120 WMF 1 20 1 December 2003 ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 5 Install the two screws A 6 Reinstall the tray cassette 2 15 T S A B3851118 WMFWMF 7 Install the two brackets B 1 stepped screw each 8 Connect the connecting harness C to the copier NOTE There are cutouts in the plug on both sides The left side has one cutout and the right side has two 9 Reinstall the cover removed
74. check bit 4 Process flow check log bit 5 Error check bit 6 Initial values bit 7 Temporary check 5 71 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 1 December 2003 Specifies the DCS MRS module debug output DCS internal event inter module event in DCS transfer log NCS library call log Event transfer in the internal thread for NCS Not used Not used Process flow check log Detailed process flow check log Not used bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 Specifies the DCS NAS module debug output Parameter data DCS internal event inter module event in DCS transfer log NCS general library call log NCS SMB client library call log NCS FTP client library call log NCS SMTP client library call log Time check Not used 5 72 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 4 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION To adjust the registration and magnification you need to use several service programs The chart shows an example of the procedure to adjust the machine in the basic configuration 5 73 Output a pattern SP5 902 Adjust the sub scan registration SP1 001 Adjust the main scan registration of each paper tray SP1 002 Output a scanned image Adjust the main scan magnification SP2 998 Adjust the main scan registration of the scanner SP4 011 Adjust the sub scan registration of
75. data and the other data see SP5 801 003 through 015 This service program SP5 801 handles the controller data Any data that is not handled by SP5 801 is the engine data The data in the BICU NVRAM engine data is cleared by SP5 998 001 while the data in the controller NVRAM controller data is cleared by SP5 801 xxx for exceptions see Exceptions Machine Data NVRAM Cleared by Remarks Basic All data BICU SP5 801 002 Engine data BICU SP5 998 001 Any data other than controller data SCS IMH MCS Copier application Fax application Printer application Controller data Controller SP5 801 xxx Scanner application Web service network application NCS R Fax DCS UCS Exceptions SP5 801 002 basic machine and SP5 998 001 MFP machine clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BICU the values return to their default values However the following settings are not cleared e SP5 807 Area Selection e SP5 811 001 Serial Num Input Code Set e SP5 811 003 Serial Num Input ID2 Code Display e SP5 812 001 Service TEL Telephone e SP5 812 002 Service TEL Facsimile e SP5 907 Plug amp Play e SP7 Data Log e SP8 History Use SP5 802 002 basic machine or SP5 998 001 MFP machine after you have replaced the BICU NVRAM or when the BICU NVRAM data is corrupted When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed When you have replaced t
76. duplex copy is made paper hasn t reached the sensor Shorted The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor NOTE SC392 is activated when the CPU detects an ID sensor error during developer initialization SP2 214 However SC392 is not displayed on the LCD but simply logged in the SC log SMC printout unless the technician exits SP Mode as soon as an error message is displayed 4 13 1 2 a e fo 5 2 7 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS 1 December 2003 4 2 2 SWITCHES Component Condition Symptom Upper Paper Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper size Size Shorted and misfeeds may occur when a copy is made from the 1st paper tray Vertical The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the Transport Door open vertical transport door is closed The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the vertical transport door is opened Lower Paper Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper size Size Shorted and misfeeds may occur when a copy is made from the 2nd paper tray By pass Paper The CPU misdetects or is not able to detect the Size 2 4 Open size of the paper set in the bypass tray causing possible misfeeds when feeding from this tray The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the right door is closed The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the right door is open The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are closed The Cover
77. e Fusing thermistor defective e Power supply board defective Fusing overheat error center 2 The fusing temperature is over 250 C for 1 second detected by the fusing temperature monitor circuit Ss 50 E e Fusing thermistor defective e Power supply board defective Fusing lamp overheat error center After the fusing temperature reaches the target temperature the fusing lamp does not turn off for 12 consecutive seconds e Fusing thermistor defective or out of position e Power supply board defective Unstable fusing temperature center The fusing temperature varies 50 C or more within 1 second and this occurs 2 consecutive times e Thermistor defective or out of position e Power supply unit defective Zero cross signal malfunction Zero cross signals are not detected within 5 seconds after the main power switch is turned on or are not detected within 1 second after operation begins e Power supply board defective e BICU defective Fusing thermistor open rear The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor is below 71 C and is not corrected after the main power switch is turned on e Fusing thermistor defective or out of position e Power supply board defective e Loose connectors Fusing temperature warm up error rear The fusing temperature rises less than 7 degrees in 2 seconds and this continues 5 times consecutively The fus
78. full of paper and it is pushed in strongly the fences may deform or bend This may cause the paper to skew or the side to side registration to be incorrect To correct this each side fence has a stopper A attached to it Each side fence can be secured with a screw for customers who do not want to change the paper size B121D960 WMF 6 11 8 PAPER REGISTRATION The drive from the main motor A is A transmitted to the registration roller through the registration clutch gear B The registration sensor C is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting paper misfeeds The cleaning mylar D contacts the D registration roller It removes paper dust from the registration roller so that this dust will not transfer into the development unit through the drum cleaning unit Detailed Descriptions The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be adjusted with SP1 003 If jams frequently occur after registration SP1 903 can be used to activate the relay clutch so that the relay roller assists the registration roller in feeding the paper along When feeding from the by pass tray the by pass feed clutch is activated turning the by pass feed roller This feature may be needed when feeding thick paper and cannot be used for the first paper feed tray IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 1 December 2003 6 12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 6 12 1 OVERVIEW B
79. gt Duplex Book gt Duplex Simplex Combine Duplex Combine 2 gt 4 gt 6 gt 8 gt 5 64 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 8427 10 9 gt 8427 11 16 gt 8427 12 Booklet 8427 13 Magazine T PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total print count classified by paper size This is the total for all application programs 8441 1 PrtPGS Ppr Size A3 84412 PrtPGS Ppr Size A4 8441 3 PrtPGS Ppr Size A5 84414 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8441 5 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8441 6 B4 B5 DLT 8441 7 T PrtPGS Ppr Size LG 84418 L PrtPGS Ppr Size LT 8441 9 PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size HLT 8441 10 PrtPGS Ppr SIze Full Bleed 8441 254 PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Standard 8441 255 8442 Af A A A A A A A A A A PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Custom C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the number of pages printed by the copier application program 8442 1 PrtPGS Ppr Size A3 8442 2 PrtPGS Ppr Size A 8442 3 0j A PrtPGS Ppr Size A 8442 4 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8442 5 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8442 6 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8442 7 Qro a 21212 PrtPGS Ppr Size 8442 8
80. in step 2 B3851902 WMF C 10 Load the paper in the paper tray and make full size copies from tray Check if the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the registrations er 3 13 1 21 ONE BIN TRAY INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 1 8 ONE BIN TRAY INSTALLATION 1 8 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories Description Installation procedure One bin sorter Exit tray Tapping screw M3 x 6 1 8 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure For B123 only For B122 go to step 3 1 Remove the inverter tray A 2 Remove the rail B 2 knob screws 3 Remove the cover C 1 rivet B6211902 WMF 1 December 2003 ONE BIN TRAY INSTALLATION 4 Open the front cover A e 5 5 5 Remove the front right cover B amp x 1 Disconnect the connector C 7 Cut the front cover as shown to make an opening D for the 1 bin tray B6211002 WMF Install the 1 bin tray E Make sure the connectors F are connected firmly 10 Fasten the screw 11 Connect the connector G that you removed in step 6 NOTE Make sure that the connector is connected B6211904 WMF 1 23 ONE BIN TRAY INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 E B6211903 WMF 12 Reattach the front right cover A 13
81. lens assembly may slide out of position Exposure glass er 3 4 1 A Lens cover A x 5 Disconnect the flat cable B Lens block C x 4 B121R951 WMF 3 4 3 LAMP STABILIZER BOARD AND EXPOSURE LAMP Slide the first scanner to a Operation panel 3 3 4 Exposure glass er 3 4 1 position where the front end of the lamp is visible Place one hand under the lamp stabilizer board A and release the hook B Lamp stabilizer board EP x 2 Press the plastic latch C and push the front end of the lamp toward the rear Lamp D with the cable B121R910 WMF 1 December 2003 SCANNER UNIT 3 4 4 ORIGINAL WIDTH LENGTH SENSOR 1 Exposure glass 3 4 1 2 Original width sensor A x 1 EB x 1 Lens block r3 4 2 4 Original length sensor B x 1 EB x 1 B121R952 WMF te 96 os on 5 5 og r4 Sensor Positions Sensor positions vary according to regions as shown below Asia including Taiwan excluding China America Europe B121R954 WMF B121R953 WMF China Sensor Positions for China Model 8K 16K B121R955 WMF SCANNER UNIT 1 December 2003 Sensor Positions for China Model 8K 16K This procedure is for China models only You rearrange the positions of the original width and length sensors for the copier to detect the following original sizes e 8K S
82. m 20 24 Ib SPEC 5 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES 2 1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION North America Europe Asia Taiwan Paper Size W x L North America Europe Asia Taiwan Platen ADF Platen ADF A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm DLT SEF 11 0 x 17 0 SEF 11 0 x 15 0 LG SEF 8 5 x 14 0 LT SEF 8 5 x 11 0 LT LEF 11 0 x 8 5 HLT SEF 5 5 x 8 5 HLT LEF 8 5 x 5 5 F GL F4 SEF 8 0 x 13 0 Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 0 Folio SEF 8 25 x 13 0 USB4 SEF 10 0 x 14 0 Eng Quarto SEF 8 0 x 10 0 Eng Quarto LEF 10 0 x 8 0 O X O X gt lt gt lt gt lt 42 m O O O O O O O O X dK gt lt OK gt lt O O Oj Oj O CO CO O xx Ox CO CO CO O OC CO OC OF O O OC O O O O X x x xix Olx CO CO CO O O CO CO O O SIGN X Detected O Not detected F Detected as F 8 5 x 13 0 5 Detected as specified A4 LT Detected as A4 or LT as specified NOTE When the settings of SP4 305 001 is 1 A4 LT the settings of SP4 303 is invalidated A5 LEF is not detected SPEC 6 1 December
83. mainframe and options excluding optional heaters key counter fax unit and printer controller Noise Emission Sound Power Level Standby Mainframe Full Not above 40 dB A system Operating Mainframe only Not above 62 dB A Operating Full System Not above 66 dB A NOTE The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 Measurements were taken from the normal position of the operator Dimensions W x D x H B121 550 x 568 x 420 mm 21 7 x 22 4 x 16 5 B122 550 x 568 x 558 mm 21 7 x 22 4 x 23 0 B123 587 x 568 x 558 mm 23 1 x 22 4 x 23 0 NOTE Measurement Conditions 1 With bypass feed table closed 2 Without the A R DF Weight B121 35 kg 77 Ib B122 43 kg 95 Ib B123 47 kg 103 Ib Excluding A R DF platen cover toner and developer SPEC 2 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS Copying Speed in Multicopy Mode copies minute A3 SEF 11 x 17 4 LEF 11 x 81 2 A3 SEF 11 x 17 A4 LEF 11 x 81 2 A3 SEF Memory 11 x 17 copy A4 LEF 11 x 81 2 DF 1 to 1 NOTE Measurement Conditions 1 Figures are for one sided original to one sided copy except where stated otherwise 2 Not APS mode 3 100 size Warm up Time Basic model Less than 15 seconds at 20 C 68 F MFP model Less than 35 seconds at 20 C 68 F First Copy Time Not more than 6 5 seconds NOTE Measurement Conditions 1 From the ready state wi
84. motor ON time used during toner recovery from Toner Near End or Toner End This setting is effective only if SP2 921 is set to 0 Since toner recovery is carried out in 3 second cycles the input value should be a multiple of 3 3 6 9 er 6 9 6 5 8 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Toner Supply Rate Adjusts the toner supply time for fixed toner supply mode This setting is effective only if SP2 921 is set to 2 3 0 7 0 t 200ms and settings are as follows 0 4 12 1 2 5 16 2 4t 6 on continuously 3 8t 7 0s Raising this value increases the toner supply motor ON time Set to a high value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas er 6 9 6 Standard Vt 0 00 5 00 2 50 0 01 V step DFU Adjusts Vts the Vt value for new developer The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial setting process This SP is effective only when SP2 921 is 0 1 or 2 ID Sensor Control 0 No 1 Yes Selects whether the ID sensor is or is not used for toner density control This value should normally be left at 1 If the value is O dirty background may occur after long periods of non use Toner End Clear Clears the toner end condition without adding new toner The following are cleared e Toner end indicator goes out e Toner near end counter e Toner near end l
85. number of scanned reverse sides of originals fed from the ADF 8381 T Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8381 1 Displays the print count of all application programs 8382 C Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8382 1 Displays the print count of the copier application program 8391 L size Prt PGS A3 DLT Larger 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8391 1 Displays the print count of the AS DLT size or larger paper 8411 Prints Duplex 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8411 1 Displays the total count of the duplex printing 5 24 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE C PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total print count of copier application classified by combination duple type C PrtPGS Dup Comb Simplex gt Duplex Original Print EE B121S909 WMF C PrtPGS Dup Comb Duplex gt Duplex Original Print 4 1215910 C PrtPGS Dup Comb Simplex Combine Original Print Bim B121S911 WMF C PrtPGS Dup Comb Duplex Combine Original Print P did B1218914 WM C PrtPGS Dup Comb 27 Original Print 1215912 PrtPGS Dup Comb 4 gt Original EE 1215913 5 25 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 8442 C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the
86. of 3 3 6 9 er 6 9 6 Toner Supply Rate Adjusts the toner supply time for fixed toner supply mode This setting is effective only if SP2 921 is set to 2 or 3 0 7 0 t 200ms and settings are as follows 0 4 12 1 21 5 16t 2 4t 6 on continuously 3 8t 7 0s Raising this value increases the toner supply motor ON time Set to a high value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas er 6 9 6 5 32 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Standard Vt 0 00 5 00 2 50 0 01 V step DFU Adjusts Vts the Vt value for new developer The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial setting process This SP is effective only when SP2 921 is 0 1 or 2 ID Sensor Control 0 No 1 Yes Selects whether the ID sensor is or is not used for toner density control This value should normally be left at 1 If the value is O dirty background may occur after long periods of non use Toner End Clear Clears the toner end condition without adding new toner The following are cleared e Toner end indicator goes out e Toner near end counter e Toner near end level This function should generally not be used If you clear the toner end condition without adding new toner there is a risk that the drum may eventually begin to attract carrier after many more copies are made and toner runs
87. or disables the APS mode 5501 PM Alarm Interval Printout 0 9999 0 OK copies step 5501 1 Specifies when the PM alarm occurs 5801 Memory Clear 5801 2 Engine 5 1 7 Machine Free Run Starts a free run of both the scanner and the printer Press ON to start press OFF to stop 5 16 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5803 5804 Input Check 5 1 8 Output Check er 5 1 9 Area Selection 5811 Selects the display language group 1 Japan 2 North America 3 Europe 4 Taiwan 5 Asia 6 China 7 Korea SP5 807 1 is not cleared by SP5 801 2 wr 5 1 7 Serial Num Input 5811 1 r 5 1 10 Service TEL Service TEL Telephone Use this to input the telephone number of the service representative The number is displayed when a service call condition occurs To input a dash press To delete the current telephone number press 9 Service TEL Facsimile Use this to input the fax number printed on user counter reports To input a dash press A To delete the current fax number press 69 5824 NVRAM Upload 58241 wr 5 1 11 5825 NVRAM Download 1 wr 5 1 11 Printer Free Run 5902 Executes the free run Press ON to start press OFF to stop Test Pattern Print 5902 1 5 1 13 Plug amp Play Setting Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function These names ar
88. out This attracted carrier may damage the drum Vref Limits Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit Upper 0 50 3 50 3 20 0 01V step DFU Lower 0 50 3 50 0 70 0 01V step DFU ID Sensor Detection Temperature 30 90 30 1 C step While the machine is recovering from an energy saver mode or while the machine starts the controller ignores the ID sensor signals if the fusing temperature is at the specified value or higher Transfer Roller Cleaning Selects whether the transfer roller is cleaned before each copy job Set this to 1 if dirty background is appearing on the reverse side of the first page of copy jobs Note that this will increase the time required to generate the first copy If the setting is 0 the transfer roller is never cleaned wr 6 12 3 Main Scan Magnification 0 5 0 5 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the magnification along the main scan direction for all print modes copy fax printing The specification is 100 1 0 er 3 13 1 5 33 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP4 XXX Scanner Sub Scan Magnification Scanner 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 196 step Adjusts the actual sub scan direction scanning magnification The higher the setting the lower the scanner motor speed er 3 13 2 Main Scan Magnification Scanner 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the magnification along the main scan direction for scanning r 3 13 2 e The s
89. the contents of key number 2225 is added to the log file in the SD card In a case like this a new log file is not made To make a new log file to supersede an old log file you must execute SP5 857 012 before executing this SP Debug Save When These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002 SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes 5858 1 Engine SC Error Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors 5858 2 Controller SC Error Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors 5858 3 Any SC Error 0 65535 0 1 5858 4 Jam Stores jam errors 5859 Debug Log Save Function 9999999 9999999 0 1 5859 1 Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for 5859 2 Key 2 functions that use common memory on the controller 5859 3 Key 3 board 5859 4 Key 4 5859 5 Key 5 5859 6 Key 6 5859 7 Key 7 5859 8 Key 8 5859 9 Key 9 5859 10 Key 10 5860 SMTP POP3 IMAP4 5860 20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout 1 168 72 1 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time 5860 21 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance 0 No 1 Yes Determines whether RFC2298 compliance i
90. the maximum size allowed for downloaded images The default is equal to 1 gigabyte 5848 1 NetFile Lower 4 Bits Only Bit switch settings 0000 No access control 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder Access and deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture 5848 4 User Directory Lower 4 Bits Switches access control on and off 5848 5 Delivery Input Lower 4 Bits 0000 OFF 5848 6 Fax Control Lower 4 Bits 5848 7 Comm Log Fax Lower 4 Bits 5849 Installation Date 5849 1 Display 5849 2 Switch to Print 5866 Remote ROM Update 0 Not allowed 1 Allowed 5856 1 When set to 1 allows reception of firmware data via the local port IEEE 1284 during a remote ROM update This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on 5857 Debug Log Save Function 5857 1 On Off 1 ON 0 ON 1 OFF Switches the debug log feature on and off The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on 5857 6 Save to SD Card Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card 5857 12 Erase Debug Data From SD Card Erases all debug logs on the SD Card If the card contains only debugging files generated by an event specified by SP5858 the files are erased when SP5857 010 or 011 is executed To enable this SP the machine must be cycled off and on 5857 13 SD Card Space Available Displays the amount of sp
91. the result of the white level adjustment Normally the value is between 228 and 281 including the both values When the value is normal it is stored as the value of SP4 901 11 4901 14 Auto Adjustment Error 0 Normal 1 Error Displays a return code of the white level adjustment The code 1 error is returned if the adjustment result value is less than 228 or larger than 281 er SP4 901 12 Exposure Lamp ON Turns the exposure lamp on or off To turn off the exposure lamp select OFF The exposure lamp shuts off automatically after 180 seconds 4903 ADS Level 0 255 252 1 step 4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level 4904 ADS Lower Limit 0 255 80 1 step 4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit ADS Level 0 All 1 One Checks the whole area 0 All or the area between 15 mm and 90 mm from the left edge 1 One to adjust the ADS level 5 37 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Image Adj Selection 6 5 4 Image Adj Selection Copy 0 10 0 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for 0 None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 3 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 5 Photo 3 6 Special1 7 Special 2 8 Special 3 9 Special4 10 Special 5 Image Adj Selection Fax 0 5 0 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for 0 None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 3 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 5 Special 1 Image Adj Selection Scanner
92. to the GW controller board when the printer scanner option is installed IMAGE PROCESSING 6 5 2 SBU SENSOR BOARD UNIT SBU Analog i Processing 1 Digital Processing IC Analog Processing 2 8 bit data 1 December 2003 B121D918 WMF The CCD converts the light reflected from the original into an analog signal The CCD line has 7 400 pixels and the resolution is 600 dpi 23 6 lines mm The CCD has two output lines for odd and even pixels to the analog processing circuit The analog processing circuit performs the following operations on the signals from the CCD 1 ZIC Zero Clamp Adjusts the black level reference for even pixels to match the odd pixels 2 Signal Amplification The analog signal is amplified by operational amplifiers After the above processing the analog signals are converted to 8 bit signals by the A D converter Each pixel will be assigned a value on a scale of 256 grades Then the digitized image data goes to the BICU board 1 December 2003 6 5 3 IPU IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT Overview BICU IPU IMAGE PROCESSING GW controller Fax Controller Controller Optional DRAM DESDE PrinterScanner Controller B121D909 WMF The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU Image Process
93. toner from the old blade with you finger Apply the toner to the edge B of the new B cleaning blade Make sure to apply the toner evenly along full length of the new cleaning blade B121R900 WMF PCU SECTION 1 December 2003 3 6 6 DEVELOPER B121R975 WMF B121R976 WMF 1 PCU 3 6 1 2 Tolet the toner fall to the development section gently tap about eight different 10 11 12 13 14 spots on the top of the PCU with a screwdriver Each spot must be approximately at an equal distance from the next spot Reinstall the PCU in the copier Turn the main switch on Open and close the front door and wait for the machine to rotate the development roller for about 10 seconds Repeat the previous step two more times PCU 3 6 1 Separate the developer section from the OPC drum section 3 6 3 Top part A of the development unit 2 x 5 NOTE Release the hook B Set the coupling C back to the shaft Turn the coupling in the direction of the arrow D to remove developer from the roller Turn the bottom part E over and rotate the gears to remove the developer Load new developer er 1 2 3 When reassembling execute SP2 214 to reinitialize the TD sensor NOTE 1 Check that no toner or developer is stuck on a gear Clean the gears as necessary with a blower brush etc 2 Be sure to replace the Mylar at the rear side in the correct position The Mylar protects the gears at the rear s
94. toner remaining for each color This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time Note e This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply 1 steps is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 1096 steps This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only Machine Status 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total operating time classified by machine status The time is displayed in the following format day hour minute second Operation Time The total time when the engine is operating Standby Time The total time when the machine is in the standby mode Energy Save Time The total time when the machine is in the energy saver mode Low Power Time The total time when the machine is in the low power mode Off Mode Time The total time when the machine is executing background printing Down Time SC The total waiting time due to SC occurrences 5 69 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Down Time Print Jam The total waiting time due to printing paper jams Down Time Original Jam The total waiting time due to original jams Down Time Toner End The total waiting time due to toner ends 5 70 1 December 2003 SP9 XXX Etc DCS Debug SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Common Specifies the DCS debug output format bit 0 Time
95. total print count classified by paper size PrtPGS Ppr Size A3 PrtPGS Ppr Size A4 PrtPGS Ppr Size A5 4 8442 1 84422 8442 3 84424 8442 5 8442 6 8442 7 8442 8 8442 9 8442 254 8442 255 PrtPGS Ppr Size B PrtPGS Ppr Size B5 PrtPGS Ppr Size DLT PrtPGS Ppr Size LG PrtPGS Ppr Size LT PrtPGS Ppr Size HLT PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Standard PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Custom OIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIO C PrtPGS Ppr Tray 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total print count classified by paper source C PrtPGS Ppr Tray Bypass Tray C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 2 C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 3 C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 4 C PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total print count classified by paper size C PrtPGS Ppr Type Normal C PrtPGS Ppr Type Thick C PrtPGS Ppr Size OHP C PrtPGS Ppr Size Other 8522 C PrtPGS FIN Sort 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8522 1 Displays the total number of printing classified by paper size 5 26 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 3 SP MODE TABLES MFP The tables in this section 5 1 3 list the service programs SPs that are available when the optional controller box B658 is installed For the SPs that are available without the optional controller box see the previous section 5 1 2
96. tray lift motor connection Tray 4 lift motor malfunction optional two tray paper tray unit The paper lift sensor fails to activate twice continuously after the tray lift motor has been on for 18 seconds 4 4 e Paper lift sensor defective e Tray lift motor defective e Too much load on the drive mechanism Poor tray lift motor connection 1 December 2003 No Definition Symptom SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Possible Cause 506 C Paper feed motor lock optional paper tra y units A motor lock signal is not detected for more than 1 5 s or the lock signal is not detected for more than 1 0 s during rotation e Paper feed motor defective e Too much load on the drive mechanism Fusing thermistor open center The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor is below 71 C and is not corrected after the main power switch is turned on e Fusing thermistor defective or out of position e Power supply board defective e Loose connectors Fusing temperature warm up error center The fusing temperature rises less than 7 degrees in 2 seconds and this continues 5 times consecutively The fusing temperature is not detected in 25 or 35 seconds e Fusing thermistor defective or out of position e Fusing lamp open e Power supply board defective Fusing overheat error center The fusing temperature is over 230 C for 1 second detected by the thermistor
97. which contain mainly text areas Photographs Actual photographs Special Unneeded background Originals through which the rear side is extremely visible or have a colored background with faint text Also for originals with very grainy backgrounds some newspapers and faint text Colored text Originals with colored text and lines Normal Pixel Photo Photo images created by dither patterns dots visible such as newspaper photos normal resolution Coarse Pixel Photo Photo images created by dither patterns dots visible such as newspaper photos coarse resolution Preserved Background Normal Text Use instead of Normal Text if e g an embedded white area causes Auto Image Density to initially remove the surrounding darker background but leave the rest Use if the customer wishes to keep this background 1 December 2003 IMAGE PROCESSING Image Processing Path This diagram shows the various stages of image processing and where they are performed A D Conversion mage Correction Auto Shading ADS White Black Line Erase Correction Scanner Gamma Correction Small Smoothing Filter Magnification Main Scan Filtering MTF Smoothing independent Dot Erase Line Width Correction 48 ID Gamma Correction Gradation Eu Diffusion Optional ithering Fax Unit Binary Picture o LE Sr 3
98. 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate for auto shading The base value stored in the machine is 15 2 mm toward the white plate from the scanner H P This SP setting specifies the offset from this base value Scanning length 3 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the length of the white plate scan in the main scan direction The scan begins at the start position set above in SP4 015 1 and extends for the specified length The base value stored in the machine is 4 76 mm This SP setting specifies the offset from this base value 5 11 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 4301 Display APS Data 4301 1 Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen DF cover sensor er 5 1 17 APS Small Size Original 0 No not detected 1 Yes A5 HLT LEF Selects whether or not the copier will consider the original to be 5 LEF when the APS sensors cannot detect its size If Yes is selected paper sizes that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as 5 LEF If No is selected Cannot detect original size will be displayed APS Priority 0 Normal 1 A4 LT 2 8K 16K 1 A4 LT e North America model When the ASP detects the LT size the controller interprets it as the A4 size e Other models When the ASP detects the A4 size the controller interprets it as the LT size 2 8K 16K for the China model only e When the A
99. 0 gt 11 1 33 MFP EXPANSION 1 December 2003 1 12 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Description Controller Box Installation procedure Controller box Operation panel Key top copier Expansion decal Screw M3 x 8 Tapping screw M3 x 6 Installation procedure Dummy cover fax Key top printer Key top scanner Cover printer USB board SD card RAM DIMM Ferrite core Operating instructions FCC label Installation procedure Dummy cover Key top fax Cover fax Right cover fax FCU Stamp SG3 label Handset bracket 17 Modular code 17 User function key decal 17 29 Operating Instructions 17 29 Ferrite core except 17 Connector cover PostScript 3 PS3 card PS3 label Printer Scanner CO CO BY GW PO 2 OD oO AI CG dM gt o o 1 D Oo e a e e el DO S Sy me me me me me SEDO Do Sm SI Om Om 1 34 1 December 2003 MFP EXPANSION 1 12 2 INSTALLING EXPANSION COMPONENT NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 2 15 T 8 Step 1 Box 1 Remove the rear cover A x 6 2 Remove the slot cover B x 1 Remove one screw C from the BICU B6581901 WMF 4 Connect the control
100. 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the length of the white plate scan in the main scan direction The scan begins at the start position set above in SP4 015 1 and extends for the specified length The base value stored in the machine is 4 76 mm This SP setting specifies the offset from this base value 5 34 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 4301 Display APS Data 4301 1 Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen DF cover sensor er 5 1 17 APS Small Size Original 0 No not detected 1 Yes A5 HLT LEF Selects whether or not the copier will consider the original to be 5 LEF when the APS sensors cannot detect its size If Yes is selected paper sizes that cannot be detected by APS sensors are regarded as 5 LEF If No is selected Cannot detect original size will be displayed APS Priority 0 Normal 1 A4 LT 2 8K 16K 1 A4 LT e North America model When the ASP detects the LT size the controller interprets it as the A4 size e Other models When the ASP detects the A4 size the controller interprets it as the LT size 2 8K 16K for the China model only e When the ASP detects the A3 B4 SEF the controller interprets it as the 8K SEF e When the ASP detects the B5 A4 SEF the controller interprets it as the 16K SEF e When the ASP detects the B5 A4 LEF the controller interprets it as the 16K LEF The Europe model interprets undetected ori
101. 01 15 Wait until the message Completed is displayed about 45 seconds 16 Activate the User Tools and select the menu Language 17 Specify a language This language is used for the operation panel 18 Load the paper in the paper tray and make a full size copy and check if the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the registrations er 3 13 1 7 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 1 3 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION 1 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check that you have the accessories indicated below No Description Q ty 1 Stepped Screw 2 1 3 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Install the platen cover A x 2 B1211910 WMF 1 8 1 December 2003 ARDF INSTALLATION 1 4 ARDF INSTALLATION 1 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK c 2 15 T S Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list Description Scale Guide DF Exposure Glass Stud Screw Knob Screw Original Size Decal Screwdriver Tool Attention Decal Top Cover B3791901 WMF 1 4 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the strips of tape B3791101 WMF ARDF INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 2 Remove the left scale A amp x 2 3 Pl
102. 1 December 2003 6 9 8 TONER NEAR END END DETECTION AND RECOVERY The toner near end and end conditions are detected using the Vt and Vref values in a similar way to toner density control This is done in all toner supply modes except for fixed mode 2 when toner end is not detected Toner Near End Detection If Vt is at level 6 see the table on the previous page five times consecutively the machine enters the toner near end condition and the toner end indicator starts blinking Then the machine supplies toner for a certain time which depends on the setting of SP2 923 see the previous page Toner Near End Recovery If the machine detects Vt lt Vref or Vts 4S 5 twice consecutively in any of the following situations the machine clears the toner near end condition e While in the toner recovery cycle supplying toner on and off for 30 s see the previous page after the machine has detected a toner near end condition e During copying in the toner near end condition e f the front cover is opened and closed for more than 10 seconds while a toner near end condition exists Toner End Detection There are two situations for entering the toner end condition e When Vt is level 7 three times consecutively the machine enters the toner end condition e When 50 copies have been made since entering the toner near end condition The number of copies between toner near end and toner end can be changed using SP2 213 Ton
103. 121D917 WMF The machine has two energy saver modes the Low Power Mode and the Night Off Mode The table lists the status of several components For the fusing temperature see section 6 13 5 Operation panel Engine Exhaust fan Operating Mode On On On Low Power Mode Off On Off Night Off Mode Off of Off The Operating Mode here refers to all the modes and status other than the Low Power Mode and Night Off Mode Actual power consumption during the Operating Mode depends on job status and environmental conditions The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller AOF When AOF is off the engine controller is unable to start the Night Off Mode The user should keep AOF on gt System Settings gt Key Operator Tools gt AOF 1 December 2003 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES Timers The engine controller references the Energy Saver Timer to start the Low Power Mode and references the Auto Off Timer to start the Night Off Mode The user can set these timers gt System Settings gt Timer Settings The Energy Saver Timer and the Auto Off Timer start at the same time to when the machine ends all jobs or when the user ends all manual operations Note that the Auto Off Timer does not wait for the Energy Saver Timer Therefore if the user specifies a smaller value in the Energy Saver Timer the Auto Off Timer expires earl
104. 121D963 WMF B121D962 WMF B121D964 WMF The transfer roller A touches the surface of the drum B The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller which attracts the toner from the drum onto the paper The current depends on the paper width paper type and paper feed tray The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate C help the paper to separate from the drum The discharge plate is grounded Drive from the drum through a gear D turns the transfer roller 1 December 2003 6 12 2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION There are two transfer current levels low and high The image transfer procedure is as follows 1 When the CPU receives the image writing start signal the CPU instructs the high voltage supply board to supply 10 low transfer current level to the roller This prevents any positively charged toner on the drum surface from transferring to the transfer roller 2 Ata certain time after the low transfer current has been supplied to the roller high transfer current is applied to the roller to transfer the toner to the paper see the table below 3 After the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the roller transfer current turns off In multiple copy mode the transfer current shifts again to the low transfer current The high transfer current levels default are as shown in the following table With SP2 301 the high tra
105. 1394 B581 N IEEE 1284 B679 N Wireless LAN B682 N Bluetooth G377 N NOTE The GW controller is supplied with the dedicated controller box and operation panel SPEC 13 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ARDF Original Size Original Weight Table Capacity Original Standard Position Separation Original Transport Original Feed Order Reproduction Range Power Source Power Consumption Dimensions W x D x H Weight Standard sizes Single sided mode A3 to A5 11 x 17 to 51 2 x 81 2 Double sided mode A3 to A5 11 x 17 to 51 2 x 81 2 Non standard sizes Single sided mode only Max width 297 mm Min width 105 mm Max length 1260 mm Min length 128 mm Single sided mode 40 128 g m 10 34 Ib Double sided mode 52 105 g m 14 28 Ib 50 sheets 80 g m 70 kg Center FRR Roller transport From the top original 50 to 20096 Sub scan direction only 24 and 5 Vdc from the copier 50W 550 x 470 x 130 mm 10 kg SPEC 14 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS ADF Original Size Standard sizes Single sided mode only A3 to A5 11 x 17 to 51 2 x 81 2 Non standard sizes Single sided mode only Max width 297 mm Min width 105 mm Max length 1 260 mm Min length 128 mm Original Weight 52 105 g m 14 28 Ib Table Capacity 30 sheets 80 g m 22 Ib Or
106. 18 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as coin lock Disable Copying DFU Clr OP Count Remv 0 2 Yes 12 Standby only 2 No Determines under which conditions the copy job settings are reset when the key counter is removed With 0 the settings are cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job or midway through a job With 1 they are only cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job With 2 they are not cleared at all under either condition With duplex copies the job settings are always preserved regardless of the setting of this SP mode Count Up Timing 0 Feed In 1 Exit 5127 Selects whether the key counter increments at time of paper feed in or at time of paper exit APS Mode 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 5127 1 Enables or disables the APS mode Application Switching Method 0 Soft Key Set 1 Hard Key Set Determines whether the application screen is switched with the hardware switch or 5302 the software switch Set Time 1440 1440 0 1 minute step 5302 2 Species the difference between your local time and GMT 5 41 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Summer Time Summer Time On Off Validates or invalidates the daylight saving time settings SP5 307 3 and 4 Summer Time Start Specifies the start of the daylight saving time SP5 307 1 validates SP5 307 3 5404 Summer Time End
107. 2003 SPECIFICATIONS China Korea China Korea China Korea localized Platen ADF Platen ADF Paper Size W x L A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5LEF 257 x 182 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm DLT SEF 11 0 x 17 0 SEF 11 0 x 15 0 LG SEF 8 5 x 14 0 LT SEF 8 5 x 11 0 LT LEF 11 0 x 8 5 HLT SEF 5 5 x 8 5 HLT LEF 8 5 x 5 5 F GL F4 SEF 8 0 x 13 0 Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 0 Folio SEF 8 25 x 13 0 USB4 SEF 10 0 x 14 0 Eng Quarto SEF 8 0 x 10 0 Eng Quarto LEF 10 0 x 8 0 O O O O O O O O OI O gt lt gt lt gt lt gt x lt OK gt lt O O X X gt lt gt lt gt lt OK O OC OI Oi O O O O OO O O O X X x OI CO 0 O O O X X O Xx TT TO Oo OO O OOJ x x xoOoOJPx x oooooo SIGN X Detected O Not detected F Detected as F 8 5 x 13 0 S Detected as specified AA LT Detected as A4 or LT as specified NOTE Change the settings of SP4 305 001 Adjust the positions of the APS sensors Change the settings of SP4 305 001 SPEC 7 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 2 2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT Main Frame Duplex Main frame tray Paper Size W x L
108. 3 10 23 942 S PLATEN COVER SENSOR 3 10 3 4 SCANNER UNIT a be red asl ree reti rot pn n n mte 3 11 3 4 1 EXPOSURE GLASS DF EXPOSURE GLASS 3 11 Exposure 41359 cielo oett a odo od os 3 11 DF Exposure Glass 3 6 6 stare d e c o eu ede UN RUDI ERA SURE 3 11 3012 LENS BLOCK 3 12 3 4 3 LAMP STABILIZER BOARD AND EXPOSURE LAMP 3 12 3 4 4 ORIGINAL WIDTH LENGTH SENSOR 3 13 Sensor POSIUOFS Eodem epe Rd NU e Fas a Cue FF o ER e ER QU SEDE 3 13 Sensor Positions for China Model 8 16 3 14 3 4 5 SCANNER MOTOR edente extent e eot exte esten tente ente 3 15 3 4 6 SCANNER HOME POSITION SENSOR 3 15 3 4 7 ADJUSTING SCANNER 3 16 bd eoo 3 16 Adjusting the First Scanner Contact 3 17 Adjusting the Second Scanner Contact 3 18 S LASER UNIT ate 3 19 3 5 1 LOCATION OF CAUTION 3 19 3 5 2 TONER SHIELD GLASS iieri ems 3 20 310 9 LASER UNIT see e a e a e ee cio DI 3 20 S RSEN S prm cec HM ee oe ee ter ee eee 3 21 3 5 5 POLYGONAL MI
109. 303 9 HLT 8301 10 Full Bleed 8303 254 Other Standard 8303 255 Other Custom 5 61 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 8305 T Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages scanned by all application programs 8305 1 A3 8305 2 A4 83053 A5 83054 B4 83055 B5 8305 6 8305 7 LG 8305 8 LT 8305 9 HLT 8301 10 Full Bleed 8305 254 Other Standard 8305 255 Other Custom 8381 T Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8381 1 Displays the print count of all application programs 8382 C Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8382 1 Displays the print count of the copier application program 8383 F Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8383 1 Displays the print count of the fax application program 8384 P Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8384 1 Displays the print count of the printer application program 8385 S Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8385 1 Displays the print count of the scanner application program O Total Prt PGS 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the print count of application programs other than copier fax printer or scanner programs such as external application programs 8391 L size Prt PGS A3 DLT Larger 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8391 1
110. 4 M M M M X F SEF 8 x 13 M M M M X F LEF 13 x 8 O O O O O Foolscap SEF 81 2 x 13 M X X X X Foolscap LEF 13 x 81 2 O O O O O Folio SEF 81 4 x 13 M M M M X Folio LEF 13 x 81 4 O O 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm M M M M X 8K LEF 390 x 267 mm 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm M M M M X 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm M M M M X C5 Env SEF 162 x 229 mm O O O O O C6 Env SEF 114 x 162 mm O O O O O DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm O O O O O Com10 SEF 41 8 x 91 2 O O O O O Monarch SEF 37 8 x 71 2 O O O O O Custom O O O O O SIGN X Detected Main frame tray Processed Duplex O Not detected Main frame tray Not processed Duplex M Selected manually K Specified from the key pad NOTE Custom W 90 to 297 mm L 148 to 600 mm SPEC 9 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 Optional Paper Tray One Bin Tray By pass Tray Paper Size W x L A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm A3 LEF 420 x 297 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm BA LEF 364 x 257 mm A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5LEF 257 x 182 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm A6 LEF 148 x 105 mm DLT SEF 11 x 17 DLT LEF 17 x 11 LG SEF 81 2 x 14 LG LEF 14 x 81 2 Gov LG SEF 81 4 x 14 Gov LG LEF 14 x 81 4 LT SEF 81 2 x 11 LT LEF
111. 423 4 Simplex Combine 8423 5 Duplex Combine 8423 6 2 gt 8423 7 4 gt 8423 8 6 gt 8423 9 8 gt 8423 10 9 gt 8423 11 16 gt 5 63 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 8423 12 Booklet 8423 13 Magazine P PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages processed for printing by the printer application program 8424 1 Simplex Duplex 8424 2 Duplex Duplex 8424 3 Book Duplex 8424 4 Simplex Combine 8424 5 Duplex Combine 8424 6 2 8424 7 4 gt 8424 8 6 gt 8424 9 8 gt 8424 10 9 gt 8424 11 16 gt 8424 12 Booklet 8424 13 Magazine S PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application program 8425 1 Simplex gt Duplex 8425 2 Duplex gt Duplex 8425 3 Book gt Duplex 8425 4 Simplex Combine 8425 5 Duplex Combine 8425 6 2 gt 8425 7 4 gt 8425 8 6 gt 8425 9 8 gt 8425 10 9 gt 8425 11 16 gt 8525 12 Booklet 8426 13 Magazine O PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages processed for printing by other application programs Simplex gt Duplex Duplex
112. 5 1 16 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY SP7 508 Viewing the Copy Jam History You can view the information on the most recent 10 events The information on older events is deleted automatically NOTE The information on jam history is saved in the NVRAM 1 Select SP7 508 2 Select one of the menu items Latest 1 through Latest 10 3 Press the OK key The summary of the jam history is displayed 4 To view more information select Detail Jam History Code Meaning Original does not reach the registration sensor Original caught at the registration sensor Original does not reach the original exit sensor Original caught at the original exit sensor Original does not reach the original reverse sensor Original caught at the original reverse sensor 5 88 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 17 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY SP6 901 Sensor Positions Small 1 Reading Data 3 N rc 1 r N Paper Size NA EU AA B5 LEF 11 x 17 B4 81 2 x 51 2 LEF A5 LEF 81 2 x 11 SEF A4 SEF 81 2 x 14 81 2 x 13 11 x 81 2 LEF A4 LEF 11 x 17 A3 51 2 X 81 2 SEF A5 SEF 1 Detected O Ol a aj lol lol l 5 89 5 SEF FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINE
113. 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE eene 1 15 1 7 ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT 1 19 sl AGOESSORY CHECK ete Ete te e Ete ice ete ete eitis 1 19 1 7 2 INSTALLATION 1 19 1 8 ONE BIN TRAY 1 22 1 8 1 ACCESSORY GHEGI taceo ttd ee aedes titus 1 22 1 8 2 INSTALLATION 1 22 1 9 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER 1 25 110 TRAY HEATERS otra Codi qure bei Psal aco lette or e ease 1 26 1 10 E UPPER TRAY HEATER EXER e Eh e a eere Us 1 26 1 10 2 LOWER TRAY HEATER TWO TRAY MODEL ONLY 1 27 1 10 3 TRAY HEATERS FOR THE OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNITS 1 28 1 11 KEY COUNTER 0 04 444000022 1 31 112 MEP EXPANSION 1 33 142 1 ACCESSORY CHECK isis season ed piri eee 1 34 1 12 2 INSTALLING EXPANSION 1 35 Step 1 Controller 1 35 Step 2 250 ns dd adiret ot eret eode o nt Feb To e Tua ua 1 36 SIBD OS OCI a oe sd bo ate 1 36 LE A om tou pm eurem Seo oot oa te aaa teats 1 37 Step 5 000111 1 37 1 12 3 INSTALLING PAN
114. 8 9 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Open the right door 2 Registration sensor A x 1 B121R985 WMF ee 9 6 os O0 55 9 lt r4 3 8 10 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND BY PASS FEED CLUTCH C 1 Rear cover er 3 3 1 2 High voltage power supply board 3 12 2 3 Clutch cover B 0 x 2 2 bushings 2 x 2 4 Paper feed clutch C 69 x 1 5 By pass feed clutch D 4 x 1 NOTE When reinstalling be sure that the rotation prevention tabs E on the clutches fit correctly into the corresponding openings on the clutch cover B B121R986 WMF PAPER FEED SECTION 1 December 2003 3 8 11 RELAY CLUTCH 1 Rear cover er 3 3 1 2 Relay clutch A EP x 1 3 8 12 RELAY SENSOR B121R987 WMF 1 Relay clutch er 3 8 11 2 Sensor bracket B amp x 1 3 Relay sensor C x 1 B B121R988 WMF 3 8 13 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 1 Rear lower cover er 3 3 2 2 Clutch bracket D x 2 3 Lower paper feed clutch E 0 x 2 1 bushing EB x 1 B121R923 WMF 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED SECTION 3 8 14 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 1 Right lower cover er 3 3 12 2 Metal plate A 7 x 3 3 Vertical transport sensor B EP x 1 B121R990 WMF te 25 os on 55 og r4 3 8 15 PAPER SIZE SWITCH 1 Paper cassette 2 Switch cover C 2 x 1
115. 8444 254 8444 255 PrtPGS Ppr Slze Full Bleed PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Standard PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Custom UV U U U Uj VU VU UU 8445 S PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the number of pages printed by the scanner application program PrtPGS Ppr Size A3 PrtPGS Ppr Size A PrtPGS Ppr Size A5 PrtPGS Ppr Size B4 PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size LT 8445 1 8445 2 8445 3 8445 4 8445 5 8445 6 8445 7 8445 8 8445 9 8445 10 8445 254 8445 255 4 5 5 DL LG L PrtPGS Ppr Size HLT PrtPGS Ppr SIze Full Bleed PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Standard PrtPGS Ppr Size Other Custom 0 0 0 0 O O O O CO CO CO 8447 O PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the number of pages printed by the scanner application program PrtPGS Ppr Size A3 PrtPGS Ppr Size A PrtPGS Ppr Size A PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Slze PrtPGS Ppr Size PrtPGS Ppr Size 8447 1 8447 2 8447 3 8447 4 8447 5 8447 6 8447 7 8447 8 8447 9 8447 10 8447 254 8447 255 oj A 9 o M D IE T LT ull Bleed Other Standard Other C
116. 9 3 Original Density B121D921 WMF 6 23 IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 Main Scan Magnification Changing the scanner speed enables enlargement and reduction along the sub scan direction However enlargement and reduction along the main scan direction is handled by the IPU SCRATCH chip The processing for main scan enlargement reduction is the same as in previous digital machines Mirroring for ADF Mode Platen Mode ADF Mode A Main Scan B121D932 WMF When making copies using the ADF the magnification circuit creates a mirror image This is because the scanning start position along the main scan direction in ADF mode is at the opposite corner of platen mode In platen mode the original is placed face down on the exposure glass The main scan start position is at corner A and the scanner moves down the page In ADF mode the ADF feeds the leading edge of the original to the DF exposure glass Therefore as mentioned above the main scan start position will be at the opposite corner To create the mirror image the IPU stores each line in LIFO Last In First Out memory 6 24 1 December 2003 IMAGE PROCESSING Filtering Overview There are several software filtering processes for enhancing the desired image qualities of the selected original mode There are three MTF filters a smoothing filter independent dot erase and line width correction Each can be used only
117. ALL CONDITIONS Possible Cause 998 B Application start error After power on the application does not start within 60 s All applications neither start nor end normally Download controller firmware Replace the controller board An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Program download error The download program print data language data from the IC card does not execute normally Board installed incorrectly BICU board defective Controller board defective IC card defective NVRAM defective Loss of power during downloading Important Notes About SC999 Primarily intended for operating in the download mode logging is not performed with SC999 If the machine loses power while downloading or if for some other reason the download does not end normally this could damage the controller board or the PCB targeted for the download and prevent subsequent downloading If this problem occurs the damaged PCB must be replaced 9 5 5 50 E ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 1 December 2003 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 4 2 1 SENSORS Component Condition Symptom Registration The Paper Jam message will appear whenever Open a copy is made paper hasn t reached the sensor The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor The Paper Jam message will appear whenever Open a copy is made except for 1st and by pass tray feedi
118. B122 B123 Remove the 2nd tray cassette A Install the two screws B 2 15 T 8 s Reinstall the tray cassette B3841106 WMF 8 Install the two brackets C 1 screw each 9 Connect the connecting harness D to the copier NOTE There are cutouts in the plug on both sides The left side has one cutout and the right side has two 10 Reinstall the cover removed in step 3 1 rivet B3841902 WMF 1 Install the four brackets E 2 screws each NOTE If a cabinet is installed this step is unnecessary B3841007 WMF TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 12 Rotate the adjuster A to fix the machine in place NOTE If a cabinet is installed this step is unnecessary B3841002 WMF 13 Load the paper in the paper trays and make full size copies from each tray Check if the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the registrations 3 13 1 December 2003 ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 7 ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 15 T 8 S Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list Description Screw M4 x 10 Stepped Screw M4 x 10 Unit Holder B3851500 WMF 1 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION If the optional fax unit is installed e Print out
119. D sensor 5 6 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TD Sensor Output Value Display Displays a Vt the current TD sensor output value and b Vref the target TD output value Vts SP2 926 correction for ID sensor output The TD sensor output value changes every copy If a gt b toner is supplied to the development unit ID Sensor Error Analysis 5 1 5 Vsg Displays the Vsg value Vsp Displays the Vsp value PWM Displays the PWM value Vsdp Displays the Vsdp value Vt Displays the Vt value Vts Displays the Vts value Transfer Current Adjustment Normal paper 2 4 mA 1 2 mMA 0 0mA 1 2 mA 2 4 mA Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray Use a high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper within spec from a paper tray 6 12 2 Thick Special paper 2 4 mA 1 2 mA 0 0mA 1 2 mA 2 4 mA Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by pass tray Use a high setting a if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by pass tray or b if waste toner is re attracted from the drum which can occur when using transparencies er 6 12 2 Duplex 2 4 mA 1 2 mA 0 0mA 1 2mA 2 4 mA Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job Use this SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies 6 12 2 C
120. DE 1 December 2003 Memory Version PN Memory Version BICU Displays the version of the BICU board 7803 Memory Version ADF Displays the P N and suffix of the ADF ROM Display PM Count 7803 1 Displays the PM counter Reset PM Counter Resets the PM counter SP7 803 1 When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed Reset SC Jam Counters Resets the SC paper original and total jam counters When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed SP7 807 1 does not reset the following logs SP7 507 Display Paper Jam History and SP7 508 Display Original Jam History Reset Counters Resets all counters except for the management counters The management counters are the counters that are not changed by NVRAM Download SP5 825 1 NVRAM Download SP5 825 1 in section 5 1 11 When the program ends normally the message the message Completed is displayed Reset Key Op Code Resets the key operator code Use SP7 810 1 when the customer has forgotten the key operator code When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed if the program ends abnormally an error message is displayed If the customer forgets the key operator code To specify a new key operator code use the User Tools System Settings Key Operator Tools Key Operator Code gt On Enter Key Operator Code Display Self Diag Displays the
121. DF Gate signal line between the ADF main board and the BICU is disconnected e ADF main board defective e Input output board defective Poor connection ADF Gate line between the ADF main board and the BICU ADF gate abnormal 2 The FGATE signal is not issued from the ADF within 30 seconds after the ADF starts feeding e ADF connector defective e SBU board defective ADF gate abnormal 3 The FGATE signal is not terminated by the ADF within 60 seconds after the ADF starts feeding e ADF connector defective e SBU board defective Startup without video output end error Video transfer to the engine is started but the engine did not issue a video transmission end command within the specified time e Controller board defective Ss 50 58 Startup without video input end A video transmission was requested from the scanner but the scanner did not issue a video transmission end command within the specified time e Controller board defective Watchdog error The CPU does not access the watchdog register within a certain time e Controller board defective e Software malfunction download controller firmware again Kernel mismatch error Software bug Download controller firmware again Self Diagnostic Error CPU The central processing unit returned an error during the self diagnostic test Controller board defective Download control
122. DF Open 0 Example 1 Example 2 Example 1 indicates that the paper size and its orientation is 81 2 x 13 SEF and that the document feeder or platen cover is open Example 2 indicates that the paper size and its orientation is A4 LEF and that the document feeder or platen cover is closed The Paper Size data starts with eight digits The first digit indicates the output of L2 the second digit L1 the third digit W2 and the fourth digit W1 The other four digits from the fifth through the eighth are always 0000 In Example 1 the APS sensors L2 and L1 detect paper W2 and W1 do not In Example 2 APS sensors W2 W1 detect paper L2 and L1 do not The paper size and its orientation is based on the outputs of these four APS sensors The DF Open data shows 1 or 0 indicating if the document feeder or platen cover is open or closed respectively The data is based on the output of the platen cover sensor A B1218920 WMF SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5 1 7 MEMORY CLEAR Basic Machine and MFP Machine The basic machine the machine without the optional controller box stores all the data in the NVRAM on the BICU The data is cleared by SP5 801 002 for exceptions see Exceptions The MFP machine the machine with the optional controller box stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BICU and stores the other data in the NVRAM on the optional controller To distinguish between the engine
123. E UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 12 Check that the message Update Done is displayed If an error occurs the error code is displayed For the information on the error codes see the table Cause 1 December 2003 Update Done Card No 1 1 Engine B1218918 WMF No Valid Data E24 B1218917 WMF Necessary Action Physical address mapping error e Insert the SD card correctly e Use another SD card Decompression error Store correct data in the SD card Update program error e Update controller program e Replace the controller SD card access error Insert the SD card correctly e Use another SD card Download data inconsistency e Insert the SD card that is used when the previous update procedure is interrupted Download data inconsistency e Insert the SD card that stores the correct data Version data error e Store the correct data in the SD card Locale data error e Store the correct data in the SD card Machine model data error e Store the correct data in the SD card Module data error e Store the correct data in the SD card Engine program error e Store the correct data in the SD card e Replace BICU Operation panel program error e Store the correct data in the SD card e Replace the operation panel board Controller program error e Store the correct data in the SD card e Replace the controller board
124. EF 270 x 390 mm e 16K SEF 195 x 270 mm 16K LEF 270 x 195 mm After you have rearranged the positions Original Length Sensors Width Sensors the sensors work as listed in the table bise x X wz Rearrange the sensor positions as iek SEF X O O O follows 16 O O x X Original present Original not present 1 Specify SP mode settings Select SP4 305 001 and specify 2 Yes The machine will detect 8K 16K rather than A3 A4 B4 B5 A3 SEF B4 SEF 8K SEF B5 SEF A4 SEF gt 16K SEF B5 LEF A4 LEF 16K LEF 2 Turn off the main switch Exposure glass 3 4 1 4 Original width length sensors A B D C B121R956 WMF B121R957 WMF 5 Rearrange the sensor positions C D 6 Turn on the main switch and check the operations 1 December 2003 3 4 5 SCANNER MOTOR 1 Left upper cover front upper left cover operation panel top rear cover 3 3 4 2 Exposure glass er 3 4 1 Rear exhaust fan A B123 only 4 Scanner motor B x 3 EB x 1 1 spring 1 belt NOTE When reassembling install the belt first and set the spring next Fasten the leftmost screw viewed from the rear and fasten the other two screws After installing the motor adjust the image quality er 3 13 3 4 6 SCANNER HOME POSITION SENSOR 1 Left upper cover top rear cover er 3 3 4 9 Exposure glass DF exposure glass if installed er 3 4 1 Disconnect the co
125. ELS AND 1 37 lcu acit P1 PR 1 37 Step Printer Scarnner Keys eiu etos pete 1 38 Slap 8 FaX KByssu na dn na ca na etai 1 38 Step 9 and Fax 1 39 1 12 2 SETRTINOS elata touto Metti 1 40 Step 10 MFP Settings and Time Settings 1 40 Step 11 Fax Selliigs rire tenerte 1 40 1 13 1EEE1284 1EEE1394 INTERFACE i st e Ex MEHE 1 41 ACCESSORY CHE OK c uite 1 42 1 13 2 INSTALLATION 1 42 UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN 1 44 SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN 1 45 1 d4 BLUETOQO TP Mono tetra oe NEU CU So Mute 1 46 1 14 1 ACCESSORY CHEONK ierat rre rtt totem tte tette 1 46 1 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE sss 1 46 PREVENTIVE 21 2 1 Na Mya Kc EE 2 1 ODUCS s doa rab raced E DU o DR DEAE DU ODE DU US ob oad DARE EUG mR 2 1 BEI p ER 2 1 PaperFeed M 2 1 FUSING Uni uoo rU D UO HUIUS ub MEE 2 2 ADF ARD Eo iceli to alat ort 2 2 Paper Trey Mle ioter dnd Dt Die pede nu ea i ds 2 2 2 2 HOW TO RESET THE PM CO
126. FO memory in the IPU SCRATCH chip The video signal information for each pixel obtained during image scanning is corrected by the IPU SCRATCH chip If the maximum value of the video level is 64 or less SC101 exposure lamp error is generated Auto shading is done before scanning for the first original as well as after scanning each page to prepare for the next page If the image density or the original mode is changed during a copy run auto shading is done before scanning the next original 1 December 2003 IMAGE PROCESSING White Line Erase The white line erase feature is validated default when you specify a value other than 0 in SP4 941 001 This feature works as follows 1 The copier scans the original 2 The density level of each pixel is compared with its adjacent pixels 3 If the density level of a pixel is extremely lower then adjacent pixels the level is corrected The density levels of the adjacent pixels are considered When you validate the white line erase feature the feature works for all originals This feature erases the white lines of 1 through 6 pixel width approximately up to 0 25 mm The white lines that exceed this width are not erased When you specify 2 instead of 1 in SP4 941 001 the feature erases darker white lines namely less whiter lines Note that this SP does not affect the width of white lines to be erased Black Line Erase The black line erase feature is the function tha
127. IMING 6 36 6 8 4 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING 6 37 B 9 DEVELOPMVIIT ir oe tete nec ette octies 6 38 6 9 1 OVES VIEWS te ete fette feti bte fete ettet 6 38 p 92 DRIVE n etait eoo ep toe Seek i o E E RN 6 39 6 9 3 DEVELOPER 222222000000000 6 39 6 9 4 DEVELOPMENT BIS 2 22 2220 6 40 6 9 5 TONER SUPPLY a E 6 41 Toner Bottle Replenishment Mechanism 6 41 Toner Supply 6 42 6 9 6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL sess 6 43 Ld tiae aste poss DER FB EFE at EDI eres 6 43 Toner Density Sensor Initial 6 45 Toner Concentration 6 45 MSDIV SO a a 6 45 Toner Supply Reference Voltage Vref Determination 6 45 Toner Supply 6 45 Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations 6 46 6 9 7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS 6 47 ID SER SOL cate 6 47 TD SENSO l taste Sis t da 6 47 vii 6 9 8 TONER NEAR END END DETECTION AND RECOVERY 6 48 Toner
128. M Web Status Monitor and remote ROM update passwords to NULL empty 5828 84 Print Settings List Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings Disables or enables Telnet operation If this SP is disabled the Telnet port is closed 5828 91 Web 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disables or enables the Web operation 5828 90 TELNET 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 5 45 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Operation Panel Image Exposure 0 Off disabled 1 On enabled 5834 Enables and disables the operation panel read dump feature After powering on the machine set this option to 1 to enable this feature To reset the machine to 0 the machine must be turned off and on again Selecting O for this option without cycling the power off and on does not restore the default setting 0 IEEE 1394 Host Name Enter name Enter the name of the device used on the network Example RNP0000000000 5839 7 Cycle Master OFF ON Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard 5839 8 BCR mode Determines how BCR Broadcast Channel Register operates on the 1394 standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM NVRAM 2bits Always Effective Writes from the IRM Standard Copies BCR of the IRM after no data is written from the IRM after the prescribed time has elapsed IRM Color Copy BCR normally enabled 5839 9
129. Make the drum charge voltage less ve smaller by 50 V e Vsdp Vsg 0 90 Make the drum charge voltage more ve larger by 50 V 6 8 3 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING The ID sensor pattern is not made every page or every job It is only made in the following conditions e During warm up at power on f the machine starts warming up after a certain time default 90 minutes has passed since entering night off mode or low power mode The 90 minute interval can be changed using SP2 994 1 December 2003 DRUM CHARGE 6 8 4 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING B121D941 WMF Because the drum charge roller A always contacts the drum it gets dirty easily So the cleaning brush B also contacts the drum charge roller all the time to clean the surface of the drum charge roller o Ss 59 3 DEVELOPMENT 1 December 2003 6 9 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 1 OVERVIEW B121D942 WMF The development unit consists of the following parts 1 Development roller 4 Mixing auger 1 2 Mixing auger 2 5 Doctor blade 3 TD sensor This machine uses a single roller development system Two mixing augers mix the developer The toner density TD sensor and image density ID sensor see the illustration in the PCU section are used to control the image density on the copy 1 December 2003 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 2 DRIVE The main motor A drives the development roller B and mixing augers
130. Mbps 200 m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd 2 15 T 8 s 12 To initialize the wireless LAN settings use page 2 2 Press Execute to initialize the following settings Transmission mode Channel Transmission Speed WEP SSID WEP Key SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802 11b SP No Name Function 5840 004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting 5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your country 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 5840 018 SSID Check Used to check the SSID 5840 020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry 1 45 BLUETOOTH 1 December 2003 1 14 BLUETOOTH 1 14 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories Description Bluetooth card Bluetooth card cover Bluetooth board 1 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure NOTE 1 Before installing the optional Bluetooth install the optional printer scanner 2 One slot is available You can install one of the IEEE 1284 interface IEEE1394 interface wireless LAN interface and Blu
131. Model K C2 Machine Code B121 B122 B123 SERVICE MANUAL December 1st 2003 Subject to change NIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1 Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals make sure that the power cord is unplugged The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off If a job has started before the copier completes the warm up or initializing period keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components because the starts making copies as soon as the warm up period is completed The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident it may cause temporary eye discomfort Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid If unsuccessful get medical attention OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner Toner dust may ignit
132. NES 5 84 5 1 13 TEST PATTERN PRINT 5 5 902 1 5 85 Executing Test Pattern Printing seen 5 85 Test PatterTig uci o D t eti iu 5 85 5 1 14 COUNTER EACH PAPER JAM 5 7 504 5 86 5 1 15 SMC PRINT SP5 lt 990 is 2o Ie inima den ent nen pein ie 5 87 5 1 16 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY SP7 508 5 88 Viewing the Copy Jam History 2 11 5 88 Jam History COU MERE 5 88 5 1 17 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY 5 6 901 5 89 SOMSOr POSILOMS eb T 5 89 Reading Dalai etna ui ieiuna dudes 5 89 5 2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 5 90 5451 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 00 es 5 90 5 2 2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 5 91 5 2 3 DATA 5 95 Uploading Content of to an SD 5 95 Downloading an SD Card to 5 95 6 DETAILED SECTION 6 1 Bil OVERVIEW sudor cetera se ee cas cat ciao rats fu catena LE EE 6 1 6 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ac iei eee eee 6 1 612 PAPER ez hast ieu Situ tat on 6 3 6 1 3 DRIVELAYOUT
133. P 01 press the A or V key Printer Program UpDate Menu P 01 Printer e To view the firmware version press the key is the information on the current firmware NEW is the information on the firmware in the SD card e To return to the menu press the 1 key Program UpDate Menu P 01 ROM B1234567A NEW B1234567B B1218917 WMF e To select the module press the OK key e To quit the firmware update program press the F3 key To select all modules press the key To cancel the selection press the C2 key e To scroll through the module name the serial number and the version press the 1 key or key 5 92 1 December 2003 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES When you have selected a module the text lines are Program UpDate Menu P 01 highlighted and the Verify ROM B1234567A key and the Update key are displayed vy wv wv Gm GD GD 1215916 Press the Verify key Check that the message Verify Done is displayed This indicates that the data is correct Engine Card No 1 1 Verify Done If the data is incorrect the message Verify Error is displayed Do not use incorrect data Engine Card No 1 1 Verify Error B1218918 WMF 10 Turn the main switch off and on 11 Select a module and press the Update key The firmware update program starts and the message Loading is displayed B1218918 WMF FIRMWAR
134. R 1 Pull out the top paper tray e 2 Open the front door A pem Ael 3 Front cover B x 4 i ee B121R945 WMF 3 6 1 December 2003 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 3 3 7 FRONT RIGHT COVER 1 Open the front door A 2 Front right cover B x 1 te 25 os O0 55 og r4 B121R946 WMF 3 3 8 RIGHT REAR COVER 1 Right upper cover 3 3 4 2 Open the duplex unit B123 only Se 3 Right rear cover A x 1 B121R947 WMF 3 7 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 1 December 2003 3 3 9 RIGHT DOOR B121 B122 DUPLEX UNIT B123 108 B121R917 WMF 1 Right rear cover er 3 3 8 2 Open the right door A 3 Open the clamps B and disconnect the two connectors B121 B122 C or three connectors B123 4 Right door 3 8 1 December 2003 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 3 3 10 BY PASS TRAY B121R907 WMF te 96 os O0 55 9 lt 474 B121R948 WMF 1 Right rear cover er 3 3 8 2 Open the right door er 3 3 9 Release the by pass tray cable from the clamps see C on the preceding page and disconnect the connector 5 pin connector with colored wires 4 Cable holder A B123 only Front side clip ring B 6 Front side pin C NOTE You can push the pin from behind the right door Front side tray holder arm D Remove the rear side clip ring pi
135. RROR 3 21 3 5 6 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT 3 22 360 PCU SECTION s cesses erbe oca eo 3 23 SRI etym 3 23 3 6 2 PICK OFF PAWLS AND TONER DENSITY SENSOR 3 23 3 09 93 OPC DEUM 2 5552 3 24 3 6 4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING 3 25 2 9 5 CLEANING BLADE drained en rettet eee on oes 3 25 S0B DEVELOBPE itii senarius bi urs DE 3 26 3 6 7 AFTER REPLACEMENT OR 3 27 9 4 TONER SUPPEY MOTOR d Ene bene EAE 3 28 3 8 PAPER FEED SECTION 3 28 3 8 1 PAPER FEED 3 28 3 9 2 FRICTION PAD A Ee eae 3 28 3 8 3 PAPER END SENSOR ne tas ne tat aee attt etas ep 3 29 3 8 4 EXIT SENSOR ebd b ed et 3 29 Non duplex Models 000400 3 29 Duplex MOSS 3 29 3 8 5 BY PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENSOR 3 30 3 8 6 REGISTRATION 222 2 3 31 3 8 7 BY PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH 5 52 decedens 3 32 3 8 8 REGIS TRAPIONACEUT GEI 3 32 3 8 9 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 keke 3 33 3 8 10 UPPER PAPER FEED CL
136. S 1 December 2003 5 2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES This section 5 2 illustrates how to update the firmware of the MFP machine the machine with the optional controller box To update the firmware of the basic machine the machine without the optional controller box see section 5 1 12 To update the firmware for the MFP machine you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD Secure Digital Card The SD Card is inserted into the lower slot on the right side of the controller box viewed from the back of the machine 5 2 1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN An SD card is a precision device so always observe the following precautions when handling SD cards e Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card Never insert the SD card into the slot with the power on After the power has been switched on never remove the SD card from the service slot e Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card e Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature high humidity or exposure to direct sunlight Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them Never drop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update software e Upload means to send data from the machine to the SD card and download means to send data from the SD card to the
137. SP detects the A3 B4 SEF the controller interprets it as the 8K SEF e When the ASP detects the B5 A4 SEF the controller interprets it as the 16K SEF e When the ASP detects the B5 A4 LEF the controller interprets it as the 16K LEF The Europe model interprets undetected original sizes as 5 LEF under following conditions i SP4 303 001 is Yes and ii SP4 305 001 is Normal The Europe model interprets undetected original sizes as LT SEF under the following conditions i SP4 303 001 is Yes and ii SP4 305 001 is A4 LT Scan Auto Adjustment Performs the automatic scanner adjustment Use this SP mode after replacing the white plate 5 12 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SBU White Level Adjustment Black Display Error 0 Normal 1 Error Displays the return code of the black level adjustment When an error is detected SC143 or SC145 is generated Black Feedback EVEN 0 8191 Displays the feedback value of the even channels given by the SBU Normally the value is 1 2 3 8188 8189 or 8190 However machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191 Black Feedback ODD 0 8191 Displays the feedback value of the odd channels given by the SBU Normally the value is 1 2 3 8188 8189 or 8190 However machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191 Black Display Target 0 63 10 step Displays the t
138. The default value for each mode is used Text 1 Photo 2 Special 2 and Special 5 have a default of 3 see below and Photo 1 and 3 have a default of 1 1 No removal applied 2 6 Removal applied at the level specified here The higher the setting level the less clear the image will become more texture removal Dithering Each pixel is compared with the threshold in a dither matrix Several matrices are available to bring out half tone areas in images such as newspaper type photographs Dithering is only used for Special 3 and Special 4 IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 6 5 4 VIDEO CONTROL UNIT VCU Fine Character and Image FCI The FCI performs image smoothing This functions only affects binary picture processed images for certain original modes Main Scan Direction 4 4 3 4 2 4 1 4 0 SubS o Y Fig A Fig B Fig C B121D933 WMF Usually binary picture processing generates jagged edges on characters as shown in the above illustration These are reduced using edge smoothing The FCI changes the laser pulse duration and position for certain pixels Fig A shows the four possible pulse durations and Fig B shows how the laser pulse can be in one of three positions within the pixel Fig C shows an example of how edge smoothing is used FCI smoothing is only effective when Text 2 or Special 1 is selected There is no SP
139. UKE 87 Digital Multimeter A2309352 4MB Flash Memory Card A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 52039502 Grease G 501 B0399099 NVRAM Minus Counter G0219350 Loop back Connector B6455010 SD Card Ass y B6456700 SD Card Adapter BN SDAA2 B6456800 AD Card USB Writer BN SDCE2 te 96 os O0 5 5 9 lt 474 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 1 December 2003 3 3 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 3 3 1 REAR COVER 1 Unplug the DF cable A if installed 2 Rear cover B amp x 6 B B121R901 WMF 3 3 2 REAR LOWER COVER TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 1 Rear cover er 3 3 1 or tray harness cover A 1 rivet 2 Rear lower cover B 2 x 2 B121R902 WMF 3 4 1 December 2003 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 3 3 3 COPY TRAY 1 Copy tray A x 2 B121R903 WMF te 25 os O0 5 5 9 lt r4 3 3 4 UPPER COVERS OF Oh cum cgo E BI21R904 MF Platen cover ARDF or ADF if installed Rear cover er 3 3 1 Left upper cover A 2 x 2 Front upper left cover B 3 Operation panel C 2 x 4 EB x 1 Right upper cover D x 1 3 hooks NOTE Push the cover to the rear side to release the hooks Top rear cover E x 1 3 5 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 1 December 2003 3 3 5 LEFT COVER 1 Left cover A x 3 B121R906 WMF 3 3 6 FRONT COVE
140. UNT ET itte ect bare ks 2 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 ST GENERAL C AW TIONS a a ed te 3 1 3 1 1 PCU PHOTOCONDUCTOR 3 1 3 1 2 TRANSFER 3 1 1 5 SCANNER DNI 52 altel 3 1 34 LASER UNIT erret reto tico 3 2 SOV FUSING UNIT etie lero E bees 3 2 24b PAPER FEED xot ont a Motore eo pito iios 3 2 Ledger 3 2 3 2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS sss 3 3 3 3 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 3 4 dl REARCGOVIBIS e cune Bri ute 3 4 3 3 2 REAR LOWER COVER TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 3 4 COPY TRAY eae ett uite e eee I See 3 5 2 91 UPPER COV ERS x eite et OH EHE 3 5 39 9 LEFT COVER saeco ie ook LSU PEDI EQUUM 3 6 9 9 D FRONT COVER ie o o bte adotta 3 6 3 9 FRONT RIGHT COVER sicque 3 7 229 0 RIGHT REAR COVER cities ot te em OE UOS ae 3 7 3 3 9 RIGHT DOOR B121 B122 DUPLEX UNIT B123 3 8 329 10 BY PASS TRAY genn te sedeo has palatia eR 3 9 3 3 11 LEFT LOWER COVER TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 3 10 3 3 12 RIGHT LOWER COVER TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY
141. UTCH AND BY PASS FEED CLUTCH3 33 2 0 14 RELAX CC ee Ps el rt nadie 3 34 3 89 12 RELAY SENSOR sate toss duda raa eei 3 34 3 8 13 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 3 34 3 8 14 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 3 35 3 60 15 PAPER SIZE SWITCH etn teen n teet ce centem on 3 35 3 9 IMAGE TRANSFER 3 36 3 9 1 IMAGE TRANSFER ROLLER esee 3 36 3 9 2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR eie eee 3 36 SOT EO denen dass han gol ea octo Sates escis ce cr 3 37 3 10 T FU SING UNLDT ee ne aes ep nn 3 37 9 10 2 MERI TOES EE bres 3 37 FUSING LAMP Sni aia d d a Be 3 38 3 10 4 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER 3 38 d TOO HOT ROLLER tees exte ee toten teen eee 3 39 3 10 6 gt THERMOSTAT uuo nen eos 3 39 3 10 7 PRESSURE ROLLER AND 3 40 3 10 8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT 3 41 3 10 9 CEEANING ROLLER a 3 42 3 11 DUPLEX UNIT DUPLEX MODELS 3 43 3 11 1 DUPLEX EXIT SENSO Rex tetas 3 43 3 11 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE
142. VRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the same SD card Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Follow this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine e f the SD card with the data is damaged or if the connection between the controller and BICU is defective the NVRAM data down load may fail e f the download fails repeat the download procedure f the second attempt fails enter the data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the data 5 2 3 Switch the copier main power switch off Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into service slot C3 Switch the copier main power switch on Execute SP5825 001 NVRAM Data Download and press the Execute key NOTE In order for the NVRAM data to download successfully the serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine If the serial numbers do not match the download will fail This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM e Total Count e C O P O Count mA OU quc 1 December 2003 OVERVIEW 6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 40 39 38 37 i 36 2 CA Zna N P c y pud 24 26 g 27 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 B121D904 WMF NOTE The above illustration is the B123 model B121 No duplex unit one paper tray B122 No duplex unit two paper trays 6
143. WMF There are one or two paper trays each of which can hold 250 sheets The paper tray feed stations use a friction pad system To prevent paper from getting caught inside the machine when the tray is pulled out the paper feed roller and shaft do not separate from the tray when the tray is pulled out The two relay sensors are used for paper jam detection The lower one detects jams when paper is fed up from the optional paper feed unit The components of the paper feed station are as follows 1 Paper End Sensor 5 Upper Relay Roller 2 Paper Feed Roller 6 Upper Relay Sensor 3 Registration Roller 7T Lower Relay Sensor 4 Paper Size Switch 8 Friction Pad 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED 6 11 2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM The main motor A drives the pick up and feed mechanism of both the first and second paper trays The paper feed clutches B transfer drive from this motor to the paper feed rollers C When the paper feed clutch turns on the feed roller starts to feed the paper The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor has been activated B121D954 WMF 6 11 3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM The paper feed roller A drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier The friction pad B allows only one sheet to feed at a time The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring C Detailed Descriptions The friction pad pressure cannot be a
144. Width Correction Copy 2 2 0 1 step Independent Dot Erase Selects the dot erase level Higher settings provide greater erasure This setting is only applied to the originals in 5 4 921 er 6 5 4 Independent Dot Erase Copy 2 2 0 1 step Positive Negative 0 No 1 Yes Inverts white and black This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 er 6 5 4 Positive Negative Copy Sharpness Edge 2 2 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in 5 4 921 6 5 4 Sharpness Edge Copy Sharpness Solid 2 2 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 6 5 4 Sharpness Solid Copy Sharpness Low ID 2 2 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 6 5 4 Sharpness Low ID Copy White Line Erase 0 2 1 1 step Selects the white line erase level 6 5 4 0 None 1 Weak 2 Strong e This setting is effective only Photo 1 Photo 3 Special 3 or Special 4 mode e 0 White line erase is not used and white level correction is used instead e This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 Black Line Erase 0 3 2 1 step Selects the black line erase level This setting is effective only when originals are scanned by the A R DF 6 5 4 0 No 1 Very weak 2 Weak 3 Strong
145. ace available on the SD card 5857 14 SD to SD Latest Copies the latest 4 MB logs to the SD card The logs are written under the log directory this SP does not copy data from the SD card in one slot to the SD card in the other slot The SP gives a unique name to the file newly saved file You can save multiple logs from multiple machines in one SD card 5857 15 SD to SD Any Copies the specified log to the SD card The logs are written under the log directory this SP does not copy data from the SD card in one slot to the SD card in the other slot This SP copies 4 MB data at the maximum and gives a unique name to the newly saved file You can save multiple logs from multiple machines in one SD card 5 50 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5857 17 Make SD Debug File Makes a 4 MB file on the SD to save logs The file stores the contents of key number 2225 of SCS for example the information of NV usage in SCS A file is made in the SD when the first log is saved in the SD even if you do not execute this SP This processing however takes a long time the user may turn the main switch off and on before completion the user see no message that indicates the completion of the logging when logs are made on the occurrence of an event The logging takes a shorter time if you have made a log file beforehand If you try to make a log file on the SD where another log file has been already made
146. ace the DF exposure glass B on the glass holder Make sure that the white mark C is on the bottom at the front end 4 Peel off the backing D of the double sided tape attached to the rear side of the scale guide E then install the scale guide amp x 2 removed in step 2 Install the two stud screws F 6 Mount the ARDF on the copier then slide it to the front 7T Secure the ARDF unit with the knob screws G 8 Connect the cable H to the copier 9 Attach the appropriate original size decal I as shown E Lo B3791501 WMF 1 December 2003 10 Attach an attention decal A to the top cover NOTE The attention decals in the package are written in different languages 11 Turn the main power switch on 12 Check that the document feeder works properly ARDF INSTALLATION B3791502 WMF 13 Make a full size copy and check that the side to side and leading edge registrations are correct If they are not adjust the side to side and leading edge registrations er 3 13 3 5 5 T a ADF INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 1 5 ADF INSTALLATION 1 5 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list Description Scale Guide DF Exposure Glass Stud Screw Fixing Screw Original Size Decal Screwdriver Tool Attention Decal Top Cover _ e lt gt B3871901 WMF
147. ading fails an error message appears If an error message appears retry the download procedure 7 Turn off the main switch Remove the memory card SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5 1 12 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR BASIC MACHINES This section 5 1 12 illustrates how to update the firmware of the basic machine the machine without the optional controller box To update the firmware of the MFP machine the machine with the optional controller box see section 5 2 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Remove the card cover A 1 rivet 3 Insert the flash memory card B B la B121S901 WMF 4 Press down the power switch on the operation panel and hold it and turn a on the main switch on the front cover 5 Select Execute C Execute 6 Do not touch any key while the message Load Status is displayed RICE This message indicates that the Load Status X k ce program is running 7 Check that the message End Sum is displayed This message indicates that the program has ended normally 8 Turn off the main switch on the front cover COPY Class3 5 827 001 Program Download End Sum H 0 20 EXP 9 Remove the flash memory card 10 Install the card cover 11 Turn the main switch on B1218904 WMF 12 Check the operation 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 13 TEST PATTERN PRINT SP5 902 1 Executing Test Pattern Printing
148. adjustment for this Printer Gamma Correction Printer correction corrects the data output from the IPU to the laser diode to account for the characteristics of the engine components e g drum laser diode lenses The machine chooses the most suitable gamma curve for the original type selected by the user There is no SP adjustment for this 6 28 1 December 2003 LASER EXPOSURE 6 6 LASER EXPOSURE 6 6 1 OVERVIEW H B121D934 WMF A LD unit 2nd mirror 2 B Synchronization detector lens A F theta lens 5 6 C Double toroidal lens B Polygon mirror amp D Shield glass C Cylindrical lens 2 E OPC drum D Synchronization detector mirror a F 1st mirror e The LD drive board controls both the laser output and laser synchronization mechanism e The machine cuts off the power supply to the LD drive board if the front or right cover is opened LASER EXPOSURE 1 December 2003 6 6 2 AUTO POWER CONTROL APC 5VLD M61880 XLDENB Video Data 1 bit APC SH 5VLD XDETP ae emi Detector GND LD Drive Board B121D935 WMF The LD driver IC drives the laser diode To prevent the intensity of the laser beam from changing because of the temperature the machine monitors the current passing through the laser diode LD The machine adjusts the current to the laser diode by comparing it with the reference level from the reference circuit This auto power control is done just
149. after the machine is turned on and during printing The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line NOTE Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field 6 30 1 December 2003 LASER EXPOSURE 6 6 3 LD SAFETY SWITCH Front Right Cover Safety Switches LDD LDD Drive Board 24V BICU Laser Beam Optical Path LD Driver IC B121D915 WMF To ensure technician and user safety and to prevent the laser beam from inadvertently switching on during servicing there are safety switches at the front and right covers o c LE Sc 3 3 When the front cover the right cover is opened the power supply to the laser diode is interrupted The switches are installed on the 24V line coming from the power supply unit then the 5VLD is generated from the 24V supply after it goes through the interlock switches 6 31 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT PCU 1 December 2003 6 7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT PCU 6 7 1 OVERVIEW B121D936 WMF The PCU consists of the components shown in the above illustration An organic photoconductor OPC drum diameter 30 mm is used in this machine 1 Cleaning Blade 6 Development Roller 2 Toner Collection Coil 7T Development Unit 3 Pick off Pawl 8 Charge Roller 4 OPC Drum 9 Charge Roller Cleaning Brush 5 ID Sensor see note 10 Quenching Lamp see note NOTE The ID sensor and quenching lamp are not included in the PCU
150. aintenance work e SSP Mode Special SP Mode The SSP Mode includes SP Mode programs and some special programs You need some extra knowledge to manipulate these special programs For details consult your supervisor I C D O E F B1218905 WMF Starting SP Mode 1 Type the keys as follows 0 a 5 0 2 Press the key and hold it down until the SP mode menu is displayed about 3 seconds 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Starting SSP Mode For the basic machine the machine without the optional controller box perform as listed in steps 1 through 4 For the MFP machine the machine with the optional controller box perform as listed in steps 1 through 5 1 Type the keys as follows exces 2 Press the key and hold it down until the SP mode menu is displayed about 3 seconds Press the key and hold it down 4 While holding down the key press the 7 key on the numeric keypad 5 While holding down the 9 key press the OK key Selecting Programs e When a blinking underscore or several blinking underscores is displayed you can type a number from the numeric keypad D e When the sign 9 OK A is displayed upper right corner you can scroll through the menu by pressing the left arrow key B or the right arrow key C To select a program press the OK key F Specifying Values 1 Af
151. al mirror and F theta lens are very sensitive to dust Do not touch the toner shield glass or the surface of the polygonal mirror with bare hands 3 1 5 FUSING UNIT 1 After installing the fusing thermistor make sure that it is in contact with the hot roller and that the roller can rotate freely Be careful to avoid damage to the hot roller stripper pawls and their tension springs Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch the inner surface of the hot roller 3 1 6 PAPER FEED 1 2 Do not touch the surface of the paper feed rollers To avoid misfeeds the side and end fences in each paper tray must be positioned correctly so as to align with the actual paper size 3 1 7 IMPORTANT 1 After installing a new PCU you must run SP2 214 to initialize the TD sensor After starting initialization be sure to wait for it to reach completion wait for the motor to stop before re opening the front cover or turning off the main switch If the optional tray heater or optics anti condensation heater is installed keep the copier s power cord plugged in even while the main switch is off so that the heater s remain energized 3 2 1 December 2003 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 3 2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS Part Number Description A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pins 4 pins set A2929500 Test Chart S5S 10 pcs set A0299387 FL
152. al sub scan direction scanning magnification The higher the setting the lower the scanner motor speed er 3 13 2 Main Scan Magnification Scanner 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the magnification along the main scan direction for scanning r 3 13 2 e The specification is 100 1 0 e Main scan magnification is implemented in steps of 0 5 Accordingly your input value should be a multiple of 0 5 1 0 0 5 0 0 5 or 1 0 Leading Edge Registration Scanner 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode wr 3 13 2 The image moves toward the leading edge e The image moves toward the trailing edge The specification is 2 1 5 mm Side to side Registration Scanner 4 2 4 2 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for scanning in platen mode wr 3 13 2 e Increasing the value shifts the image to the right e The specification is 2 1 5 mm Scan Erase Margin Adjusts the scanning margin individually for each of the four edges It is generally best to adjust the scanning margin as little as possible and use the printing margin for image adjustments Leading edge 0 9 0 1 0 0 1 mm step Trailing edge Left Right Scanner Free Run Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on Press ON or to start Press OFF to stop White Plate Scanning Start position 3 0 6
153. ally an error message is displayed If the customer forgets the key operator code To specify a new key operator code use the User Tools System Settings Key Operator Tools Key Operator Code gt On gt Enter Key Operator Code 7826 MF Device Error Count For Japan Only 7827 MF Device Error Count Clear For Japan Only Display Self Diag Displays the SC codes found during the self diagnostics test and the number of their occurrences Each number is in the range of 0 to 9999 7901 Assert Info DFU These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code generated by the machine 7901 1 Source File Name 7901 Number of lines 79015 5 58 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Dsply Info Count Displays the total operating time or the total number of operations The time is displayed in the following format day hour minute second Dsply Info Count Dsply APS Working The total of the time when the APS is working Dsply Info Count Dsply ID S Work The total of the time when the ID sensor is working Dsply Info Count Dsply Dev Counter The total number of paper outputs Dsply Info Count Dsply ID Er Count The total number of ID sensor errors Reset Info Count Reset Info Count Reset ID Er Count Clears the counter of SP7 991 5 5 59 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP8 XXX History T Total Scan PGS 0 9999999
154. arget value for the black level adjustment executed during machine initialization Normally the value is 10 Other values indicate that the adjustment has ended unsuccessfully 4901 5 White Target 0 511 511 1 step Displays the target value for the white level adjustment 4901 6 White Result 0 511 0 1 step Displays the result of the white level adjustment 4901 8 White Display Error 0 Normal 1 Error Displays the return code of the white level adjustment When an error is detected SC143 is generated 4901 10 White Display Overflow 0 Normal 1 Error Displays a return code of the white level adjustment The code 1 error is returned if the adjustment result is not in the range of the values in SP4 901 6 White Number of Attempt 0 20 0 1 step Displays how many times the white level adjustment is retried The value does not include the first execution of the white adjustment For example if the value is 2 this indicates that the white level adjustment has been executed three times The white level adjustment can be executed 20 times or less Therefore if the value is 20 this indicates that the white level adjustment has ended abnormally as described the value 20 does not include the first execution If the white level adjustment is unsuccessful the machine uses the result of the latest successful white level adjustment 4901 11 Auto Ad
155. arm Selects the machine reaction to door open Memory Clear 5801 1 All Clear Executes the following memory clears at the same time SP5 801 2 through 12 5801 3 SCS Initializes the system control service settings 58014 IMH Memory Clear Initializes the image memory handler settings 5801 5 MCS Initializes the memory control service settings 5801 6 Copier application Initializes the copier application settings 5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax application settings 58018 Printer application Initializes the printer application settings 5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner application settings 5801 10 Web service Network application Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails and initializes the job login ID 5 43 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5801 11 NCS Initializes the network control service settings the system defaults and interface settings including IP addresses Smart Net Monitor for Administrator Web Status Monitor settings and the TELNET settings 5801 12 R Fax Initializes the job log in ID Smart Net Monitor for Administrator job history and local storage file numbers 5801 14 Clear DCS Settings 5801 15 Clear UCS Settings Machine Free Run 5803 5804 Starts a free run of both the s
156. bout 5 cm 2 from the end of the cable G Initializing the Fax Unit When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation an error occurs This is not a functional problem Press OK The fax starts its initialization program NOTE If another error occurs after initialization this can be a functional problem F Pus B6581907 WMF Step 5 Reassembling E 1 Reassemble the controller box 2 Install the rear cover 1 12 3 INSTALLING PANELS AND KEYS Step 6 Panel A 1 Remove the front upper left cover 99 A x 3 gt 2 Install the optional operational panel B ER x 1 x 4 including three screws removed in step 1 If installing the printer scanner only do step 7 If installing the fax only do step 8 B658I908 WMF If installing both the printer scanner and the fax do step 9 MFP EXPANSION 1 December 2003 Step 7 Printer Scanner Keys D c Remove the dummy cover from the basic operation panel and install the copy key A or a Remove the dummy panel from the basic operation panel and install the printer panel B B6581909 WMF Install the scanner key C or c on the optional operation panel Install the dummy panel D on the optional operation panel Install the printer key E or e on the basic operation panel Step 8 Keys E e A a
157. canner and the printer Press ON to start press OFF to stop Input Check 5 1 8 Output Check er 5 1 9 Area Selection Selects the display language group 1 Japan 2 North America 3 Europe 4 Taiwan 5 Asia 6 China 7 Korea SP5 807 001 is not cleared by SP5 801 001 and SP5 998 001 wr 5 1 7 SC Code Reset 5811 Resets all level A service call conditions such as fusing errors If the reset is successful the display shows Completed If the reset fails an error message is displayed er 4 1 Service Call Conditions Serial Num Input 5811 1 5 1 10 Service TEL Service TEL Telephone Use this to input the telephone number of the service representative The number is displayed when a service call condition occurs To input a dash press 5 To delete the current telephone number press 59 Service TEL Facsimile Use this to input the fax number printed on user counter reports To input a dash press e To delete the current fax number press 9 5 44 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Remote Service I F Setting 0 diagnostics off 1 Serial CSS or NRS remote diagnostics on 2 Network remote diagnostics Enables or disables the remote diagnostics function CE Call Allows the customer representative to start or end the remote machine check using CSS or NRS by pressing the center report key 5816 3 Function Flag 0 Disabled 1
158. concentration in the development unit reaches the standard level or for up to 2 minutes whichever comes first Polygon Mirror Motor Idling Time 0 None 1 15s 2 25s Selects the polygon mirror motor idling time To increase the speed of the first copy the mirror motor begins idling when the user sets an original touches a key or opens the platen cover or DF If this setting is left at the default 15 s the motor will stop if the user does nothing for 15s If the setting is O the motor will not switch off during standby But note that regardless of the setting the motor will switch off when the machine enters energy saver mode Toner Supply Mode 0 Sensor 1 1 Sensor 2 DFU 2 Fixed 1 DFU 3 Fixed 2 Selects the toner supply mode Under normal conditions this should be set to O You can temporarily change this to 3 if the TD sensor is defective Do not set to 1 or 2 as these are for design use only 6 9 6 Toner Supply Time 0 1 5 0 0 4 0 1 s step Adjusts the toner supply motor ON time for Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 toner supply mode Accordingly this setting is effective only if SP2 921 is set to 0 or 1 Raising this value increases the toner supply motor ON time Set to a high value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas er 6 9 6 Toner Recovery Time 3 60 30 1 s step Adjusts the toner supply
159. copier model B121 Remove the 1st tray cassette Two tray copier models B122 B123 Remove the 2nd tray cassette B1211008 WMF Two tray paper feed unit A B1211006 WMF 10 Remove the two screws C and install the two hexagonal socket screws D 11 Reinstall the 1st tray and rear cover C B1211003 WMF 1 December 2003 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION 1 11 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure e 5 5 T C B1211906 WMF A E F B1211100 WMF Remove the left cover er 3 3 8 Remove the rear cover 3 3 1 Remove the cap A with nippers Punch out the small hole B using a screwdriver E CE M Hold the key counter plate nuts C on the inside of the key counter bracket D and insert the key counter holder E 6 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket 2 x 2 7 Install the key counter cover F x 2 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Hold the cable with the clamps B C D B1211908 WMF Connect the connector A to CN126 on the BICU Install the clamps B NOTE The relay cable is not included in the key counter bracket accessories Join the relay cable E with the connector F Reinstall the rear cover Pas
160. copy paper length detected by the registration sensor This means that copy time for the first page may be slower because of the longer time required for scanning but it will be normal for the rest of the job Original size detection using the ADF is described in the manual for the ADF 6 12 1 December 2003 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 5 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 5 1 OVERVIEW Optional DRAM Drum LD Driver Fax Controller GW Controller Printer Scanner Controller B121D908 WMF The CCD generates an analog video signal The SBU Sensor Board Unit converts the analog signal to a 8 bit digital signal then it sends the digital signal to the BICU board The BICU board can be divided into three image processing blocks the IPU Image Processing Unit FCI Fine Character Image and VCU Video Control Unit e IPU Auto shading filtering magnification scanner y correction ID y correction e VCU Printer y correction LD print timing control and laser power PWM control e FCI inside the VCU Smoothing o LE Ss 3 3 NOTE The VCU contained the same IC called SCRATCH on the BICU Finally the BICU board sends the video data to the LD drive board at the proper time The DRAM on the BICU provides memory for the copier features In addition optional DRAM is added
161. de 3 54 le as meme 3 54 Standard White Density 3 55 3 13 3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 222222 222222222411 3 56 Registration and Blank Margin 3 56 Sub scan 3 56 4 TROUBLESHOOTING creto 4 1 4 1 SERVICE CALL 5 4 1 SUDAN ds 4 1 4 1 2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 4 2 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT 4 12 4 2 1 SENSORS een 4 12 4 2 2 SWITCHES aeneo S d S eia 4 14 4 3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS eese 4 14 44 EED DISPLAY CM EE 4 15 BAW BICU niss Ue eU S E EE 4 15 5 SERVICE TABLES ab inaa alarik 5 1 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM 5 1 511 USING SE MODE a eed 5 1 Starting sp OG Cott sca tele oe Ho HM 5 1 Starting SSP Mode t oratio drerate deerat eene deren deerat 5 2 Selecting 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 6 5 2
162. ding edge SP4 010 2 1 5mm A Side to side SP4 011 2 1 5mm A Leading edge registration B 1 B Side to side registration B121R507 WMF Magnification AH B A Main scan magnification B Sub scan magnification B121R508 WMF Main Scan Magnification 1 Place the A3 test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio If necessary adjust the magnification using the following SP mode SP mode Specification Main Scan Magnification SP4 009 1 0 1 December 2003 COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING Sub scan Magnification 1 Place the OS A3 test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 3 Check the magnification ratio If necessary adjust the magnification using the following SP mode SP mode Specification Sub scan magnification SP4 008 1 0 Standard White Density Adjustment This procedure adjusts the standard white density level Carry out this adjustment after doing any of the following e After replacing the standard white plate e After replacing the NVRAM on the BICU But note that you do not need to carry out this adjustment if you have replaced the BICU itself but retained the previous NVRAM board by moving it over onto the new BICUJ e After performing a memory all clear SP5 801 2 for Basic machine SP5 998 1 for MFP machine s BICU engine te 96 os O0 55 9 lt 44 Procedure
163. djusted B121D955 WMF PAPER FEED 1 December 2003 6 11 4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM When the paper tray A is closed projection B on the copier frame pushes slider C on the bottom part of the paper tray off the bottom plate hook D After the release slide comes off compressed springs lift the bottom plate B121D956 WMF 6 11 5 PAPER END DETECTION If there is any paper in the paper tray the paper stack lifts the feeler the paper end sensor A is deactivated When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout B in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up B121D957 WMF 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED 6 11 6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION Paper Tray SW Size A3 11 x 17 A4 LEF 4 SEF 81 2 11 LEF 81 2 x 14 See 81 2 x 13 11 x 81 2 O Asterisk ON Not pushed O OFF Pushed B121D958 WMF There are three paper size microswitches A on the front right plate of the paper tray unit The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator B behind the paper size indicator plate which is on the front right of the tray Each paper size has its own actuator with a unique combination of notches To determine which s
164. do so use caution not to place too much load on the cable 2 Sensor holder A By pass paper end sensor B EP x 1 4 By pass feed roller C 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED SECTION 3 8 6 REGISTRATION ROLLER te 96 os O0 5 5 9 lt 474 B121R982 WMF B121R921 WMF PCU er 3 6 1 Front cover er 3 3 6 Right door 3 3 9 Rear cover er 3 3 1 High voltage power supply er 3 12 2 Registration clutch 3 8 8 Unhook the springs A and B at the rear and front sides Guide support C and guide D x 1 EB x 1 Bushing E 5 x 1 10 Gear and bushing G 69 x 1 11 Registration roller H with the image transfer unit I Or 00 OD OON ope c 3 31 PAPER FEED SECTION 1 December 2003 3 8 7 BY PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH By pass tray er 3 3 10 Tray lever A 0 x 1 1 pin Lift the upper tray B DM quc By pass paper size switch C 8 x 1 NOTE When reinstalling the switch Move the paper guides to their middle position about halfway between fully open and fully closed and install the round gear so that the hole in the gear D aligns with the peg E on the sliding gear B121R983 WMF 3 8 8 REGISTRATION CLUTCH B121R922WMF B121R984 WMF 1 Rear cover er 3 3 1 2 High voltage power supply board with the bracket 2 x 4 all connectors 3 Registration clutch G x 1 EB x 1 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED SECTION 3
165. e 15 to 80 RH 3 Ambient Less than 1 500 lux do not expose to direct sunlight Illumination 4 Ventilation 3 times hr person or more 5 Ambient Dust Less than 0 075 mg m 2 0 x 10 6 Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes 1 Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner 2 Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater 7 Do not place the machine where it is exposed to corrosive gases Do not install the machine at any location over 2 000 m 6 500 ft above sea level 9 Place the copier on a strong and level base Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm 10 Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations 1 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back Within 5 mm 0 2 of level Right to left Within 5 mm 0 2 of level 1 December 2003 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Place the copier near the power source providing clearance as shown 2 15 T 8 front 750 mm 30 left 150 mm 6 rear 50 mm 2 right 250 mm 10 A B C D B1211901 WMF NOTE The recommended 750 mm front space is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out Additional front space is required to allow operators to stand at the front of the machine 1 1 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS NCAUTION Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible After completing installa
166. e sensor The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor Toner Density Open SC390 is displayed Shorted Image Density Open The toner density control process is changed Shorted see the note below the table Shorted 4 12 1 December 2003 Component Condition ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS Symptom Scanner H P Open Shorted SC120 is displayed Platen Cover Open APS and Auto Reduce Enlarge do not function correctly Shorted If the Start button is pressed with the platen cover or A R DF closed Cannot detect original size is displayed Original Width Open Shorted The CPU cannot detect the original size properly APS and Auto Reduce Enlarge do not function correctly Original Length Open Shorted The CPU cannot detect the original size properly APS and Auto Reduce Enlarge do not function correctly Duplex Entrance Open The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a duplex copy is made paper hasn t reached the sensor Shorted The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor Duplex Exit Open The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a duplex copy is made paper hasn t reached the sensor Shorted The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor Duplex Inverter Open The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a
167. e Stops feeding the thick paper and keeps it at the registration sensor and waits for the fusing temperature to reach the predefined temperature the temperature 5 C lower than the Thick Paper Temperature The fusing temperature keeps rising until it reaches the Thick Paper Temperature while the thick paper travels from the registration sensor to the fusing unit e Continues feeding paper and executes the print job if the fusing temperature is high enough b1 b2 Standby Mode When the copier is not making copies the fusing temperature is set to the Standby Temperature 2 SP1 105 3 4 You can adjust this temperature However if you have raised this temperature the BICU may be unable to generate an SC code in the event of fusing lamp error While in the Standby Mode the copier checks the fusing temperature every 1 5 seconds G SP1 108 1 Turning on and off the fusing lamp may affect the voltage of the power source in the room causing the fluorescent lights in the room to flicker To lighten such trouble you can adjust the control period However if you elongate this period to two seconds or longer the BICU may be unable to generate an SC code in the event of a fusing lamp error e Low Power Mode o LE Sc 59 3 When the Energy Saver Timer gt System Settings gt Timer Settings Energy Saver Timer expires the fusing temperature is set to the Low Power Temperature T4 SP1 105
168. e original jams history The list below shows the possible seven codes 210 211 212 213 214 215 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7 505 For example the code 210 corresponds to SP7 505 210 and the code 211 corresponds to SP7 505 211 Memory Version PN 7801 255 7803 Memory Version ADF ROM Displays the serial number and the version of the BICU and the serial number and version of the ADF software Display PM Count 7803 1 Displays the PM counter 5 57 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Reset PM Counter Resets the PM counter SP7 803 1 When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed Reset SC Jam Counters Resets the SC paper original and total jam counters When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed SP7 807 1 does not reset the following logs SP7 507 Display Paper Jam History and SP7 508 Display Original Jam History Reset Counters Resets all counters except for the management counters The management counters are the counters that are not changed by NVRAM Download SP5 825 1 NVRAM Download SP5 825 1 in section 5 1 11 When the program ends normally the message the message Completed is displayed Reset Key Op Code Resets the key operator code Use SP7 810 1 when the customer has forgotten the key operator code When the program ends normally the message Completed is displayed if the program ends abnorm
169. e page As with previous digital copiers the user can select manual image density when selecting ADS and the machine will use both settings when processing the original By Original Type ADS mode is only enabled when the user has selected e Text mode 1 or 2 Normal or Sharp Photo mode 2 Text Priority or Special mode 1 or 2 Unneeded background or Colored Text This can be done using Adjust Original Mode 3 in User Tools Copier Features 1 December 2003 IMAGE PROCESSING Scanner Gamma y Correction The CCD output is not proportional to the quantity of light received Scanner y correction corrects the CCD output so that grayscale data is proportional to the quantity of light received The machine has two possible scanner gamma curves Text and Photo When selecting Text the machine does not use scanner y correction As a result the output is darker than the image density on the original The advantage of this is that the machine can bring out gradations in paler areas The disadvantage is that the machine cannot bring out gradations in darker areas i e differences in shades of dark colors are hard to distinguish When selecting Photo the machine uses scanner y correction One advantage of this is that the machine can bring out gradations in dark areas of photo image originals The disadvantage is that it in some cases images come out lighter than the customer desires Output Density o Ss 5
170. e registered in the NVRAM If the NVRAM becomes defective these names should be re registered Use the right arrow or left arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names To select a brand name press the OK key An asterisk indicates which manufacture is currently selected 5 1 7 5 17 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 A3 DLT Counter Display 0 Off 1 On Sets the key press display for the counter key This setting has no relation to SSP SP5 104 A3 DLT Double Count SMC Print All 5 1 15 SP User Program Logging Data Big font 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP6 XXX Peripherals ADF Adjustment 3 13 3 NOTE Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration ADF Adjustment StoS Front Regist 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for the front side of the original for ADF mode Use the key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment Leading Regist 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF mode Use the e5 key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment Trailing Erase 3 0 3 0 1 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode Use the e key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment StoS Rear Regist 5 0 5 0 0 0
171. e relay sensor 7504 12 Counter Each P Jam On 1 Vertical SN Paper is caught at the relay sensor 7504 21 Counter Each P Jam Off 2 Vertical SN Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor 7504 22 Counter Each P Jam On 2 Vertical SN Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor 7504 31 Counter Each P Jam Off 3 Vertical SN Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor in the optional paper feed unit 7504 32 Counter Each P Jam On 3 Vertical SN Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor in the optional paper feed unit 7504 50 Counter Each P Jam Off Regist Bypass Paper does not reach the registration sensor from the by pass tray 5 55 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 7504 60 Counter Each P Jam Off Regist Duplex Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse side printing for duplex printing 7504 70 Counter Each P Jam On Regist SN Paper is caught at the registration sensor 7504 120 Counter Each P Jam On Exit SN Paper is caught at the exit sensor previous page 7504 121 Counter Each P Jam Off Exit SN Paper does not reach the exit sensor 7504 122 Counter Each P Jam On Exit SN Paper is caught at the exit sensor 7504 123 Counter Each P Jam Off Dup Inverter Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor from the registrat
172. e suddenly when exposed to an open flame Dispose of used toner developer and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations These are non toxic supplies Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations LASER SAFETY The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH prohibits the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Z WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure Z WARNING FOR LASER UNIT WARNING Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes CAUTION MARKING CAUTION VORSICHT INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN _ gt PS lt Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows
173. ear holding plate D x 1 Fusing lamp with the connector 600W E 2 x 2 6 Fusing lamp with the connector 550W x 2 E m When reassembling check that the front ends of the two lamps fit in the front holding plate They do not fit in there if you arrange the two lamps incorrectly 3 10 4 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER PAWLS Hot roller er 3 10 5 Roller guard A x 3 Metal holders B 1 holder for each Hot roller stripper pawls C 1 spring for each B wr I B121R928 WMF 1 December 2003 FUSING 3 10 5 HOT ROLLER 1 Hot roller stripper pawls er 3 10 4 2 Hotroller A 2 C rings 1 gear eJ 2 bearings oS JS A B121R994 WMF 25 os O0 5 5 loa 9 lt 474 3 10 6 THERMOSTAT 1 Hot roller er 3 10 5 2 Thermostat A 2 x 2 for each B121R929 WMF FUSING 1 December 2003 3 10 7 PRESSURE ROLLER AND BUSHINGS Oe E uot E C D B121R995 WMF Separate the hot roller section from the pressure roller section er 3 10 3 Fusing entrance guide A x 2 2 springs B 2 pressure arms C 2 Bushings D Pressure roller E 3 40 1 December 2003 FUSING 3 10 8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT Execute this adjustment when the fusing unit is at its operating temperature The size of the OHP sheet must be A4 LT LEF Any other sizes may cause a paper jam te 96 os O0 55 9 lt 474 A Pressure roller
174. en corrected with the ID sensor output Vref is used after Vts has been corrected with the ID sensor output voltage corrected during the first toner density control for a new PCU Toner supply amount Varies Toner end detection Mode Performed Sensor control 2 SP2 921 1 For designer s use only do not use in the field Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage Vts Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1 mode However the reference voltage used is always Vts Toner supply amount Varies Toner end detection Mode Performed Fixed control 1 SP2 921 2 For designer s use only do not use in the field Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage Vts or Vref Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1 mode Toner supply amount Fixed SP2 925 Toner end detection Mode Performed Fixed control 2 SP2 921 3 Use temporarily if the TD sensor needs to be replaced Toner supply decision None Toner control process Toner is supplied every printed page regardless of Vt Toner supply amount Fixed SP2 925 Toner end detection Not performed 6 44 1 December 2003 DEVELOPMENT Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting The TD sensor initial setting SP2 214 Developer Initialize procedure must be done
175. er if black this indicates the second side N N N N 251451 6 2 3p8 5h 7 D o O B121D971 WMF B121D923 WMF 1 December 2003 DUPLEX UNIT 6 14 4 FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM B121D972 WMF o Sc 3 3 B121D913 WMF During duplex copying the inverter gate solenoid A switches on and the junction gate B switches over to direct the paper to the inverter When the paper trailing edge reaches the duplex inverter sensor C the inverter roller D reverses its rotation direction and the paper goes to the duplex unit The paper is then sent to the mainframe registration rollers to print the reverse side If there are two or more copies being made with A4 81 2 x 11 SEF or smaller the next sheet waits at the registration sensor for the current sheet to exit the inverter ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES 1 December 2003 6 15 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES This section 6 15 illustrates the energy saver modes of the basic machine the machine without the optional controller For the energy saver modes of the MFP machine the machine with the optional controller see section 6 16 Overview Power consumption Operating Mode Low Power Mode Night Off Mode em Energy Saver Timer i Auto Off Timer L to B
176. er End Recovery While turning on the main switch if the front cover is opened for 10 seconds or more and then closed while a Toner End condition exists following toner bottle replacement the machine clears the Toner End condition The recovery procedure is the same as for toner near end It takes about two minutes 6 48 1 December 2003 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING 6 10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING 6 10 1 DRUM CLEANING The cleaning blade A removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is transferred to the paper This model uses a counter blade system The cleaning blade scrapes off toner remaining on the drum When toner builds up in the cleaning unit toner at the top of the pile is removed by the toner collection coil B To remove the toner and other particles that are accumulated at the edge of the cleaning blade the drum turns in reverse for about 5 mm at the end of every copy job B121D950 WMF 6 10 2 TONER RECYCLING Toner picked up by the toner collection coil A is transported to the opening B in the side of the PCU Then this toner falls into the development unit with new toner coming from the toner bottle and it is all mixed together by mixing auger 1 C and used again B o S s 3 3 B121D951 WMF A B B121D952 WMF C 6 49 PAPER FEED 1 December 2003 6 11 PAPER FEED 6 11 1 OVERVIEW B121D953
177. erter SN The original does not reach the reverse sensor 7505 215 Counter Each O Jam On Inverter SN The original is caught at the reverse sensor 5 56 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Counter Each P Jam Displays the total number of the paper 0 9999 0 1 step jams classified by the paper sizes 7506 5 Counter Each P Jam A4 LEF 7506 6 Counter Each P Jam A5 LEF 7506 14 Counter Each P Jam B5 LEF 7506 38 Counter Each P Jam LT LEF 7506 44 Counter Each P Jam HLT LEF 7506 132 Counter Each P Jam A3 SEF 7506 133 Counter Each P Jam A4 SEF 7506 134 7506 141 Counter Each P Jam B4 SEF 7506 142 Counter Each P Jam B5 SEF 7506 160 Counter Each P Jam DLT SEF 7506 164 Counter Each P Jam LG SEF 7506 166 Counter Each P Jam LT SEF 7506 172 Counter Each P Jam HLT SEF 7506 255 Counter Each P Jam A5 SEF Counter Each P Jam Other Dsply P Jam Hist Displays the latest 10 paper jam history The list below shows the possible 22 codes 1 10 11 12 21 22 31 32 50 60 70 120 121 122 123 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7 504 For example the code 1 corresponds to SP7 504 1 and the code 10 corresponds to SP7 504 10 Dsply O Jam Hist 7801 Displays the total number of th
178. es of originals fed from the ADF T Scan PGS TWAIN 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of sheets stamped by the ADF in fax jobs and scanning jobs 8293 F Scan PGS TWAIN 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8293 1 Displays the total number of sheets stamped by the ADF in fax jobs 8295 S Scan PGS TWAIN 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step 8295 1 Displays the total number of sheets stamped by the ADF in scanning jobs 5 60 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 8301 T Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages scanned by all application programs 8301 1 A3 8301 2 A4 8301 3 A5 83014 B4 83015 B5 8301 6 83017 LG 83018 LT 8301 9 HLT 8301 10 Full Bleed 8301 254 Other Standard 8301 255 Other Custom 8302 Counter Paper Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages scanned by the copier application program 8302 1 A3 83022 A4 83023 A5 83024 B4 83025 B5 8302 6 83027 LG 83028 LT 83029 HLT 8301 10 Full Bleed 8302 254 Other standard size 8302 255 Other custom size 8303 T Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages scanned by the fax application program 8303 1 A3 83032 A4 83033 A5 8303 4 B4 83035 B5 8303 6 83037 LG 83038 LT 8
179. et 3 Turn the face of the flash memory card A A is printed on it toward your left hand side and insert it into the card slot A 4 Turn on the main switch Start the SP mode and select SP5 824 001 6 The machine erases the settings on the card if any then writes the machine s settings to the flash memory card This takes about 20 seconds If uploading fails an error message appears If an error message appears retry the upload procedure B121S901 WMF 7 Turn off the main switch Remove the memory card 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE NVRAM Download SP5 825 1 SP5 825 1 copies the data from the flash memory card to the NVRAM The following data is NOT copied the data in the NVRAM remains unchanged e SP8 221 001 e SP8 221 002 e SP8 381 001 SP8 382 001 e SP8 391 001 e SP8 411 001 ADF Original Feed Front ADF Original Feed Back Total Total Printer Pages Copy Application Total Print Pages Large Size Print Pages A3 DLT Larger Prints Duplex 1 Turn off the main switch 2 Remove the card cover B 1 rivet 3 Turn the face of the flash memory card A A is printed on it toward your left hand side and insert it into the card slot 4 Turn on the main switch Start the SP mode and select SP5 825 001 6 The machine erases the current settings then writes the new settings onto the NVRAM on the BiCU board This takes about 1 second If downlo
180. etooth interface 1 Remove the slot cover A x 2 2 Install the Bluetooth board B on the controller board 2 2 3 Reattach the rear cover B B6821901 WMF 1 46 1 December 2003 BLUETOOTH 4 Insert the Bluetooth card A into the slot A b B 7 Press the antenna B to extend it uii 6 Attach the antenna cap C id Pd B6821903 WMF C 1 47 1 December 2003 PM TABLES 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2 1 PM TABLES NOTE 1 After preventive maintenance work reset the PM counter SP7 804 001 2 PM intervals 60k 80k and 120K indicate the number of prints Key As necessary C Clean R Replace L Lubricate Inspect Optics Reflector Optics cloth 1st mirror Optics cloth 2nd mirror Optics cloth 3rd mirror Optics cloth Scanner guide rails Do not use alcohol Platen cover Replace the platen sheet if necessary Blower brush or alcohol Exposure glass Blower brush or alcohol Toner shield glass Blower brush APS sensors Drum Area Blower brush PCU Drum Developer Charge roller Cleaning brush charge roller Cleaning blade OPC drum Pick off pawls Transfer roller ID sensor Paper Feed e x Blower brush NOTE Paper feed roller each tray Clean with water or a
181. evel This function should generally not be used If you clear the toner end condition without adding new toner there is a risk that the drum may eventually begin to attract carrier after many more copies are made and toner runs out This attracted carrier may damage the drum Vref Limits Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit Upper 0 50 3 50 3 20 0 01V step DFU Lower 0 50 3 50 0 70 0 01V step DFU ID Sensor Detection Temperature 30 90 30 1 C step While the machine is recovering from an energy saver mode or while the machine starts the controller ignores the ID sensor signals if the fusing temperature is at the specified value or higher 5 9 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Transfer Roller Cleaning Selects whether the transfer roller is cleaned before each copy job Set this to 1 if dirty background is appearing on the reverse side of the first page of copy jobs Note that this will increase the time required to generate the first copy If the setting is 0 the transfer roller is never cleaned er 6 12 3 Main Scan Magnification 0 5 0 5 0 0 0 1 step Adjusts the magnification along the main scan direction for all print modes copy fax printing The specification is 100 1 0 er 3 13 1 5 10 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP4 XXX Scanner Sub Scan Magnification Scanner 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 196 step Adjusts the actu
182. from the old BICU and install it on the new BICU The NVRAM stores machine specific data Replacement Adjustment B121R933 WMF 3 12 4 MAIN MOTOR 1 Rear cover er 3 3 1 2 Main motor x 4 EB x 1 B121R503 WMF A 3 47 OTHER REPLACEMENTS 1 December 2003 3 12 5 REAR EXHAUST FAN B123 ONLY 1 Rear cover 3 3 1 B 2 Rear exhaust fan A x 2 EP x 1 Reassembling When reassembling make sure that the i Vs um arrow on the fan B points the outside of 1 the copier The arrow indicates the direction of the air current B121R934 WMF 3 12 6 LEFT EXHAUST FAN Rear cover er 3 3 1 Left cover er 3 3 5 Fan cover A x 3 Fan B x 3 EB x 1 p e NS c Reassembling When reassembling make sure that the arrow on the fan C points the outside of the copier The arrow indicates the direction of the air current B B121R935 WMF 3 12 7 PSU POWER SUPPLY UNIT 1 Left cover er 3 3 5 2 PSU A all connectors x 6 B121R943 WMF 3 48 1 December 2003 OTHER REPLACEMENTS 3 12 8 GEARBOX Replacement Procedure 1 Inverter tray A 2 Two screws B from the middle rear cover NOTE This step releases the topmost part of the BICU bracket 3 High voltage power supply board with the bracket er 3 8 8 te 96 os O0 55 QT 9 lt 474 4 BICU with the bracket C 2 6 NOTE If you have difficulty to
183. ginal sizes as 5 LEF under following conditions i SP4 303 001 is Yes and ii SP4 305 001 is Normal The Europe model interprets undetected original sizes as LT SEF under the following conditions i SP4 303 001 is Yes and ii SP4 305 001 is A4 LT Scan Auto Adjustment Performs the automatic scanner adjustment Use this SP mode after replacing the white plate 5 35 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SBU White Level Adjustment Black Display Error 0 Normal 1 Error Displays the return code of the black level adjustment When an error is detected SC143 or SC145 is generated Black Feedback EVEN 0 8191 Displays the feedback value of the even channels given by the SBU Normally the value is 1 2 3 8188 8189 or 8190 However machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191 Black Feedback ODD 0 8191 Displays the feedback value of the odd channels given by the SBU Normally the value is 1 2 3 8188 8189 or 8190 However machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191 Black Display Target 0 63 10 step Displays the target value for the black level adjustment executed during machine initialization Normally the value is 10 Other values indicate that the adjustment has ended unsuccessfully 4901 5 White Target 0 511 511 1 step Displays the target value for the white level
184. he controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM data is corrupted use SP5 801 001 The message is the same as the basic machine 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE With Flash Memory Card Basic Machine Only 1 Upload the data to a flash memory card er 5 1 11 2 Print out all SMC data lists 5 1 15 NOTE Be sure to print out all the lists You have to manually change the SP settings if the NVRAM data upload ends abnormally Select SP5 801 002 4 Press the OK key Select Execute The messages Execute followed by Cancel and Execute are displayed 6 Select Execute 7 When the program has ended normally the message Completed is displayed If the program has ended abnormally an error message is displayed 8 Press the cancel key 9 Turn the main switch off and on 10 Download the data from a flash memory card 5 1 11 Without Flash Memory Card Print out all SMC data lists er 5 1 15 Select SP5 801 002 basic machine or SP5 998 001 MFP machine Press the OK key Select Execute The messages Execute followed by Cancel and Execute are displayed d cer Select Execute 6 When the program has ended normally the message Completed is displayed If the program has ended abnormally an error message is displayed 7 Turn the main switch off and on 8 Adjust the printer and scanner registration and magnification er Copy Adjustment in chap
185. he delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book 5846 7 Delivery Server Retry Times 0 255 0 1 Sets the number of retry attempts delivery server address book when the delivery server fails to acquire the 5846 8 Delivery Server Maximum Entries 2000 50000 2000 1 Sets the maximum number accou managed by UCS nt entries of the delivery server user information 5846 50 Initialize All Directory Info Clears all directory information managed by UCS including all user codes 5846 51 Upload All Directory Info Uploads all directory information to the IC card 5846 52 Download All Directory Info Downloads all directory information from the IC card 5846 80 Backup FCU Backs up all directory information to the FCU ROM 5846 90 Plain Data Forbidden Allows you to prevent the address from plain data This is a security function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data 0 No check Address book data not protected 1 Check Allows operation of UCS without data from SC card and without creating address book information with plain data SSP 5846 99 Sets UCS debug output DFU 5 49 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Web Service 5847 2 sets the 4 bit switch assignment for the access control setting Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router 5847 100 sets
186. he operation mode of the WEP key Displayed only when the option 801 11b for wireless LAN is installed Net File Analysis 5842 1 5843 Specifies the output mode for debugging of each net file process The 8th bit is reserved The 7th bit is the switch of debugging output for each module Operation Panel Image Exposure 0 Off disable 1 On enable 5843 1 Enables and disables the operation panel read dump feature After powering on the machine set this option to 1 to enable this feature To reset the machine to 0 the machine must be turned off and on again Selecting 0 for this option without cycling the power off and on does not restore the default setting 0 5 47 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5844 USB 5844 1 Transfer Rate Full Speed Auto Change Sets the speed for USB data transmission Full Speed 12 Mbps fixed Auto Change 480 Mbps 12 Mbps auto adjust 5844 2 Vendor ID 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x05CA 1 DFU Sets the vendor ID Initial Setting OxO5CA Ricoh Company 5844 3 Product ID 0x0000 0xFFFF 0 0403 1 DFU Sets the product ID 5844 4 5845 Device Release Number 0000 9999 0100 1 DFU Sets the device release number of the BCD binary coded decimal display Enter as a decimal number NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD Delivery Server Setting Provides items for delivery server se
187. he room causing the fluorescent lights in the room to flicker To lighten this problem you can reduce the checking repetition to 20 times When machine initialization ends the fusing temperature is set to one of the following temperatures e The Standby Temperature 2 SP1 105 3 4 when there is no print job e The First Print Temperature when the copier has received a print request during machine initialization You cannot directly adjust the First Print Temperature This temperature is 10 C higher up to 185 C than the Copying Temperature Copying Mode C Copying Mode When the copier is making copies the fusing temperature is set to one of the following temperatures e The Warm Up Temperature SP1 105 1 2 to output the first print after the Low Power Mode Low Power Mode e The Copying Temperature T4 SP1 105 5 6 to output the second print and after the second You can raise the Warm Up Temperature to make better the fusing quality of the first print While the copier is adjusting the fusing temperature to the Warm Up Temperature the message Copy starts after warm up is displayed 1 December 2003 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT c Thick Paper Mode When the machine is making copies on thick paper the fusing temperature is set to the Thick Paper Temperature SP 1 105 9 10 When thick paper reaches the registration sensor the copier checks the fusing temperature and executes one of the following processing
188. he screw Install the four screws for the laser unit loosely do not tighten the screws or counterclockwise by one notch of the lever the corners of the pattern shift by 0 4 mm from the leading and trailing edges See the trim pattern made in step 2 and find how much the corners should be shifted ud 10 Tighten the screw 11 Tighten the screws on the laser unit 9 When you rotate the lever clockwise 12 Reinstall the tray B121R968 WMF 13 Print the trim pattern and check the result If further adjustment is required repeat this procedure 1 December 2003 PCU SECTION 3 6 PCU SECTION 3 6 1 PCU 1 Toner bottle with the holder A 2 Open the right door ee 25 os On 55 9 lt r4 B 3 Press the latch B and pull out the PCU C NOTE Do not touch the OPC drum surface with bare hands 4 Load new developer er 3 6 6 5 When reassembling execute SP2 214 to reinitialize the TD sensor 3 6 2 PICK OFF PAWLS AND TONER DENSITY SENSOR CAUTION Do not turn the PCU upside down This causes toner and developer to spill out 1 PCU 3 6 1 2 Pawl A NOTE Pull down the pawl and release the bottom end 3 Toner density sensor B x 1 NOTE The toner density sensor is taped to the bottom of the PCU Pry it off with a regular screwdriver B121R970 WMF 4 After reinstalling the pick off pawls or toner density sensor
189. he shading processing in the ADF mode Light and heat in the room may affect the scanner response Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs 5 54 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP7 XXX Data Log 7001 Total Operation 7001 1 7401 Displays the total operation time total drum rotation time Counter SC Total 0 9999 0 1 step 7401 1 7403 Displays how many times SC codes are generated SC History 7403 1 Latest Displays the histories of the latest 10 SC codes 74032 Latest 1 7403 3 Latest 2 74034 Latest 3 7403 5 Latest 4 7403 6 Latest 5 7403 7 Latest 6 7403 8 Latest 7 7403 9 Latest 8 7403 10 7502 Latest 9 Counter Paper Jam 0 9999 0 1 step 7502 1 7503 Displays the total number of copy paper jams Counter Orgn Jam 0 9999 0 1 step 7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams Counter Each P Jam Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location 0 9999707 1 step 7504 1 Counter Each P Jam At power on Paper jam occurs at power on 7504 10 Counter Each P Jam Off Regist NoFeed Paper does not reach the registration sensor from a paper tray 7504 11 Counter Each P Jam Off 1 Vertical SN Paper does not reach th
190. how many times SC codes are generated 7403 SC History 7403 1 Displays the histories of the latest 10 SC codes 7502 Counter Paper Jam 0 9999 0 1 step 7502 1 Displays the total number of copy paper jams 7503 Counter Orgn Jam 0 9999 0 1 step 7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams 7504 Counter Each P Jam 0 9999 0 1 step Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location 7504 1 Counter Each P Jam At power on Paper jam occurs at power on 7504 10 Counter Each P Jam Off Regist NoFeed Paper does not reach the registration sensor from a paper tray 7504 11 Counter Each P Jam Off 1 Vertical SN Paper does not reach the relay sensor 7504 12 Counter Each P Jam On 1 Vertical SN Paper is caught at the relay sensor 7504 21 Counter Each P Jam Off 2 Vertical SN Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor 7504 22 Counter Each P Jam On 2 Vertical SN Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor 7504 31 Counter Each P Jam Off 3 Vertical SN Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor in the optional paper feed unit 7504 32 Counter Each P Jam On 3 Vertical SN Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor in the optional paper feed unit 7504 50 Counter Each P Jam Off Regist Bypass Paper does not reach the registration sensor fr
191. ide from falling toner 1 December 2003 PCU SECTION 3 6 7 AFTER REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT IMPORTANT After replacing or adjusting any of the PCU components do the following procedure This procedure is not necessary when you replaced the whole PCU with a new one 1 Take 5 sample copies 2 f black dots dropped toner appear on any of the copies continue as follows If all copies are clean you don t need to carry out the following steps Remove the PCU from the mainframe 4 Tap the top of the PCU with a screwdriver at eight evenly spaced locations two or three taps at each spot to knock the recycled toner down into the development section 5 Put the PCU back into the mainframe 6 Turn the main power on Then open and close the door wait for the machine to rotate the development roller for 10 seconds Then open and close the door two more times so that total rotation time is 30 seconds te 96 5E os O0 5 5 og 474 7 Make some sky shot copies solid black prints e If using A4 81 2 x 11 paper make 4 copies prints e f using A3 11 x 17 paper make 2 copies prints solid black prints use SP5 902 pattern 8 NOTE Step 7 is required only after parts replacement or adjustment There is no need to make sky shot or solid black copies after replacing the developer TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 1 December 2003 3 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR Copy tray er 3 3 3 Open the front d
192. ier than the Energy Saver Timer In a case like this the Low Power Mode is not activated Instead the engine controller starts the Night Off Mode when the Auto Off Timer expires Specified value Low Power Mode Night Off Mode Energy Saver Timer Auto Off Timer Can start Can start Energy Saver Timer Auto Off Timer Cannot start Can start Energy Saver Timer Auto Off Timer Cannot start Can start Recovery Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode e The power switch is pressed e Originals are set on the document feeder e The platen cover or document feeder is opened o Ss 59 3 6 73 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES 1 December 2003 6 16 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES This section 6 16 illustrates the energy saver modes of the MFP machine the machine with the optional controller For the energy saver modes of the basic machine the machine without the optional controller see section 6 15 Overview Power consumption Operating Mode Low Power Mode Night Off Mode Energy Saver T Time Timer System AUG i Auto Off Timer Reset Timer mon to 2 seconds B121D916 WMF The machine has three energy saver modes the Low Power Mode the Transit Mode and the Night Off Mode The Transit Mode continues for about two seconds probably the user does not recognize this m
193. iginal Standard Position Center Separation FRR Original Transport Roller transport Original Feed Order From the top original Reproduction Range 50 200 Power Source 24 and 5 Vdc from the main frame Power Consumption 25 W Dimensions W x D x H 550 mm x 470 mm x 90 mm Weight Not above 7 kg SPEC 15 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 ONE TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT Paper Size Paper Weight Tray Capacity Paper Feed System Paper Height Detection Power Source Power Consumption Weight Size W x D x H A5 to A3 51 2 x 81 2 SEF to 11 x 17 60 105 g m 16 28 Ib 500 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib x 1 tray Feed roller and friction pad 4 steps 10096 7096 3096 Near end 24 Vdc and 5Vdc from the copier printer 120 Vac 120 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed 220 240 Vac 230 V version from the copier printer when the optional tray heater is installed Max 20 W Copying printing 23 W Optional Tray Heater On Average 13 W Copying printing 15 W Optional Tray Heater On 12 kg 26 4 Ib 550 mm x 520 mm x 134 mm SPEC 16 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT Paper Size A5 to A3 51 2 x 81 2 SEF to 11 x 17 Paper Weight 60 105 g m 16 28 Ib Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib x 2 trays Paper Feed System Feed roller and friction pad Paper Height Detection 4 steps 100 70 30 Near end
194. ing Unit on the BICU board which carries out the following processes on the image data Auto shading ADS ID gamma correction Se HRS e OORO 9 Error diffusion 10 Dithering 11 Video path control 12 Test pattern generation White black line correction Scanner gamma correction Magnification main scan Filtering MTF and smoothing Binary picture processing o Xs Ss 3 3 The image data then goes to the VCU basic machine to the GW controller MFP machine NOTE The IPU and VCU are contained in the same IC called SCRATCH on the BICU IMAGE PROCESSING Image Processing Modes 1 December 2003 The user can select Text Photo and Special original types However each of these original types has a range of different choices such as sharp which are listed in the table below photographs etc e All modes can be customized with a range of SP modes that can be adjusted to meet user requirements e The user can select the mode that best suits their original with the following user tool Original Type User Tools Copier Features Image Adjustment Original Type Mode Targeted Original Type Text Normal Normal text originals Sharp Newspapers originals through which the rear side is moderately visible as faint text Photo Photo priority Text photo images which contain mainly photo areas Text priority Text photo images
195. ing it te 25 os O0 55 Q FT 9 lt 474 B121R916 WMF 3 5 5 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR Laser unit er 3 5 3 Two rubber bushings A Laser unit cover B 2 x 1 Polygonal mirror motor C x 4 pica eg pas cs After reassembling adjust the image quality er 3 13 B121R966 WMF LASER UNIT 1 December 2003 3 5 6 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT NWARNING Reinstall the copy exit tray before turning the main switch on The laser beam may go out of the copier when the copy exit tray is not installed The laser beam can seriously damage your eyes 1 Start the SP mode 2 Select SP5 902 1 and output the Trimming Area pattern pattern 10 Check that the four corners of the pattern make right angles e f they make right angles you do not need to adjust the laser unit alignment e f they do not make right angles go on to the next step 4 Check the screw position on the lever A e f the screw is in the hole C go on to the next step e f the screw is in the slot D loosen the screw on the lever loosen the four screws on the laser unit and go on to step 9 NOTE The initial position of the screw is in hole C Four screws in the laser unit 3 5 3 C 52 897 wwe Remove the lever 2 x 1 confirm the position of the hole beneath the slot D and reinstall the lever 7 Install the screw through the slot D loosely into the hole beneath the slot do not tighten t
196. ing temperature is not detected in 25 or 35 seconds 4 5 e Fusing thermistor defective or out of position e Fusing lamp open e Power supply board defective SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 1 December 2003 No Definition 553 A Fusing overheat error rear The fusing temperature is over 230 C e Fusing thermistor defective for 1 second detected by the e Power supply board defective thermistor Fusing lamp overheat error rear After the fusing temperature reaches e Fusing thermistor defective or out of the target temperature the fusing lamp position does not turn off for 20 consecutive Power supply board defective seconds Unstable fusing temperature rear The fusing temperature varies 50 C or e Thermistor defective or out of more within 1 second and this occurs 2 position consecutive times Power supply unit defective Left exhaust fan motor error The CPU detects an exhaust fan lock e Loose connection of the exhaust fan signal for more than 5 seconds motor e Too much load on the motor drive Symptom Possible Cause Rear exhaust fan motor error The CPU detects an exhaust fan lock e Loose connection of the exhaust fan signal for more than 5 seconds motor e Too much load on the motor drive Communication error between BICU and ADF The BICU does not receive a response Poor connection between the BICU from the ADF main board for 4 seconds and ADF main board DF connector or m
197. ion 7505 210 Counter Each O Jam Off Regist SN The original does not reach the registration sensor 7505 211 Counter Each O Jam On Regist SN The original is caught at the registration sensor 7505 212 Counter Each O Jam Off Relay SN The original does not reach the exit sensor 7505 213 Counter Each O Jam On Relay SN The original is caught at the exit sensor 7505 214 Counter Each O Jam Off Inverter SN The original does not reach the reverse sensor 7505 215 Counter Each O Jam On Inverter SN The original is caught at the reverse sensor 7505 216 Counter Each O Jam Insufficient gap The distance between originals is not sufficient This jam can occur when the original is not of the standard size Dsply P Jam Hist Displays the latest 10 paper jam history The list below shows the possible 22 codes 1 10 11 12 21 22 31 32 50 60 70 120 121 122 123 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7 504 For example the code 1 corresponds to SP7 504 1 and the code 10 corresponds to SP7 504 10 Dsply O Jam Hist Displays the total number of the original jams history The list below shows the possible seven codes 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7 505 For example the code 210 corresponds to SP7 505 210 and the code 211 corresponds to SP7 505 211 5 21 SERVICE PROGRAM MO
198. ion roller 7504 125 Counter Each P Jam On Dup Inverter Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor 7504 126 Counter Each P Jam Off Dup Entrance Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor 7504 127 Counter Each P Jam Off Dup Entrance Paper is caught at the duplex entrance sensor 7504 128 Counter Each P Jam Off Duplex Exit Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor 7504 129 Counter Each P Jam On Duplex Exit Paper is caught at the duplex exit sensor 7504 130 Counter Each P Jam Off 1 bin Exit SN Paper does not reach the one bin tray 7504 131 Counter Each P Jam On 1 bin Exit SN Paper is caught at the one bin tray Counter Each O Jam 0 9999 0 1 step Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred at a certain timing or at a certain location 7505 1 Counter Each O Jam at Power On The original jam occurs during the standby mode 7505 210 Counter Each O Jam Off Regist SN The original does not reach the registration sensor 7505 211 Counter Each O Jam On Regist SN The original is caught at the registration sensor 7505 212 Counter Each O Jam Off Relay SN The original does not reach the exit sensor 7505 213 Counter Each O Jam On Relay SN The original is caught at the exit sensor 7505 214 Counter Each O Jam Off Inv
199. ize has been installed the CPU reads which microswitches the actuator has switched off The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected If the paper size actuator is broken or if there is no tray installed the Add Paper indicator will light o LE Ss 3 3 When the paper size actuator is at the mark the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using User Tools If the paper size for this position is changed without changing the User Tool setting a paper jam will result PAPER FEED 1 December 2003 By pass Tray A B121D959 WMF The by pass feed paper size switch A monitors the paper width The side fence is connected to the terminal plate gear When the side fences move to match the paper width the circular terminal plate rotates over the wiring patterns on the rectangular part of the paper size switch The patterns for each paper width in the paper size switch are unique North America CN No BICU 11 x 17 812 x 14 51 2 x 81 2 CN136 1 ON OFF OFF OFF CN136 2 OFF OFF ON CN136 3 GND OFF OFF OFF CN136 4 OFF ON OFF CN136 5 ON ON OFF Europe Asia CN No BICU A3 A5 SEF CN136 1 ON OFF OFF CN136 2 OFF ON OFF CN136 3 GND OFF OFF CN136 4 OFF OFF CN136 5 ON OFF 6 54 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED 6 11 7 SIDE FENCES A If the tray is
200. justment Setting 222 281 256 1 step Displays the parameter of the white level adjustment The value is based on the result of SP4 901 12 4901 12 Auto Adjustment Result 0 600 0 1 step Displays the result of the white level adjustment Normally the value is between 228 and 281 including the both values When the value is normal it is stored as the value of SP4 901 11 4901 14 Auto Adjustment Error 0 Normal 1 Error Displays a return code of the white level adjustment The code 1 error is returned if the adjustment result value is less than 228 or larger than 281 er SP4 901 12 5 13 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Exposure Lamp ON Turns the exposure lamp on or off To turn off the exposure lamp select OFF The exposure lamp shuts off automatically after 180 seconds 4903 ADS Level 0 255 252 1 step 4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level 4904 ADS Lower Limit 0 255 80 1 step 4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit ADS Level 0 All 1 One Checks the whole area 0 All or the area between 15 mm and 90 mm from the left edge 1 One to adjust the ADS level Image Adj Selection 6 5 4 Image Adj Selection Copy 0 10 0 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 are used for 0 None 1 Text 1 2 Text 2 3 Photo 1 4 Photo 2 5 Photo 3 6 Special1 7 Special 2 8 Special 3 9 Special4
201. k the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list c 2 15 T S Description Screw M4x10 Unit Holder Adjuster Unit Holder B3841500 WMF 1 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION 1 If the optional fax unit is installed e Print out all messages stored in the memory e Print out the lists of user programmed items e Print out the system parameter list e Disconnect the telephone line If the optional printer unit is installed e Print out all data in the printer buffer e Disconnect the network cable Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure Remove the strips of tape Make sure that you have removed all the strips of tape S and all the pieces of cardboard gt B3841158 WMF TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 1 December 2003 2 Attach the adjuster A to the base plate as shown NOTE If a cabinet is installed this step is unnecessary B3841001 WMF 3 Remove the cover B 1 rivet CAUTION Before placing the copier on the paper tray unit make sure that the harness C is safe The paper tray unit does not function properly if the harness is damaged 4 Setthe copier on the paper tray unit B3841117 WMF 1 December 2003 TWO TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION 5 One tray copier model B121 Remove the 1st tray cassette A Two tray copier models
202. lcohol Friction pad each tray Clean with water or alcohol Bottom plate pad each tray Clean with water or alcohol Paper feed roller bypass tray Clean with water or alcohol Friction pad bypass tray Clean with water or alcohol Bottom plate pad by pass tray Clean with water or alcohol Registration rollers Clean with water or alcohol Relay rollers Clean with water or alcohol Paper feed guides Clean with water or alcohol Paper dust Mylar QI OPO LO OP Q O O O O oloolo oolo oo o EZ Clean with water or alcohol oo gt lt 6 ce 99 otc 9 lt PM TABLES Fusing Unit 1 December 2003 Hot roller Pressure roller Pressure roller cleaning roller Hot roller bushings Pressure roller bushing Hot roller stripper pawls Dry cloth Thermistor ADF ARDF Dry cloth NOTE Feed belt Clean with water or alcohol Separation roller Clean with water or alcohol Pick up roller Clean with water or alcohol Stamp Replace when necessary White plate Clean with water or alcohol DF exposure glass Clean with water or alcohol Platen cover Paper Tray Unit Clean with water or alcohol NOTE Paper feed rollers Dry or damp cloth Bottom plate pads Dry cloth Paper feed guides Clean with
203. leaning 10 0 21 1 mA step Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning Increase the current if toner remains on the roller after cleaning Remaining toner may cause dirty background on the rear side 6 12 2 Forced Developer Churning Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output Vt The machine mixes the developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value The machine does not initialize the TD sensor output If the machine has not been used for a long period of time prints may have a dirty background In this case use this SP mode to mix the developer The message Completed is displayed when the program ends normally 5 7 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Tailing Correction Shift value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Shifts the image writing position in intervals specified by SP2 906 2 When making many copies of an original that contains vertical lines such as in tables the paper may not separate correctly This can cause tailing images ghosts of the vertical lines continuing past the bottom of the table This SP can be used to prevent this Interval 1 10 1 1 page step Changes the interval for the image shift specified by SP2 906 1 Forced Toner Supply Forces the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit Press 1 to start The machine continues to supply toner until the toner
204. ler box D to the BICU Make sure that the BICU is not damaged E and that the three openings F IG H hold the controller box 5 Fasten the screws 7 x 7 including the screw C 6 Remove the FCU cover I x 3 MFP EXPANSION 1 December 2003 Step 2 Printer Scanner 1 Remove the controller box cover A 2 x 7 2 Install the RAM DIMM B Remove the SD card cover C 2 1 4 Install the SD card D in the upper slot NOTE The lower slot is for service work Install the SD card cover Remove the slot cover E x 2 Install the USB board F x 2 Attach the ferrite core G to the network cable H The end of the ferrite core must be about 15 cm 6 from the end of the cable I 9 USA model only Attach the FCC label J at the right hand side of the USB connector on the controller box H 7 G B6581912 WMF B6581904 WMF Step 3 PostScript Install the PS3 card A in the DIMM socket B B6811903 WMF 1 December 2003 MFP EXPANSION Step 4 Fax 1 Install the FCU A into the slot x 3 including the screw B removed in Step 1 2 Short the jumper C NOTE This jumper is the battery switch 2 Installation 3 Attach the connector cover D if you do not connect a LAN able 4 Attach the ferrite core E to the telephone cable F The end of the ferrite core must be a
205. ler firmware again Self Diagnostic Error ASIC The ASIC returned an error during the self diagnostic test because the ASIC and CPU timer interrupts were compared and determined to be out of range e Controller board defective Self diagnostic Error Network Interface The network interface board returned an error during the self diagnostic test e Network interface board defective e Controller board defective Self diagnostic Error NVRAM The resident non volatile RAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test 4 7 e Replace the NVRAM on the controller board e Replace the controller board SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS No Definition Symptom 1 December 2003 Possible Cause 826 B Self diagnostic Error NVRAM Optional N VRAM The NVRAM or optional NVRAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test e Replace the NVRAM on the controller board Self diagnostic Error RAM The resident RAM returned a verify error during the self diagnostic test e Download controller firmware again Self diagnostic Error ROM The resident read only memory returned an error during the self diagnostic test e Controller board defective e Download controller firmware again Self diagnostic Error Optional RAM The optional RAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test e Replace the optional memory board e Controller board defective
206. ling time To increase the speed of the first copy the mirror motor begins idling when the user sets an original touches a key or opens the platen cover or DF If this setting is left at the default 15 s the motor will stop if the user does nothing for 15s If the setting is 0 the motor will not switch off during standby But note that regardless of the setting the motor will switch off when the machine enters energy saver mode Toner Supply Mode 0 Sensor 1 1 Sensor 2 DFU 2 Fixed 1 DFU 3 Fixed 2 Selects the toner supply mode Under normal conditions this should be set to O You can temporarily change this to 3 if the TD sensor is defective Do not set to 1 or 2 as these are for design use only er 6 9 6 Toner Supply Time 0 1 5 0 0 4 0 1 s step Adjusts the toner supply motor ON time for Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 toner supply mode Accordingly this setting is effective only if SP2 921 is set to 0 or 1 Raising this value increases the toner supply motor ON time Set to a high value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas er 6 9 6 Toner Recovery Time 3 60 30 1 s step Adjusts the toner supply motor ON time used during toner recovery from Toner Near End or Toner End This setting is effective only if SP2 921 is set to 0 Since toner recovery is carried out in 3 second cycles the input value should be a multiple
207. lmost equal intensity to reduce shadows on pasted originals An optics anti condensation heater is available as an option It can be installed on the left side of the scanner It turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in o LE Sr 5 3 a Lamp Stabilizer Fuse B121D928 WMF Rating Manufacturer Type No ICP1 DC50 V 1 5 A ROHM CO LTD 38 6 9 SCANNING 1 December 2003 6 4 2 SCANNER DRIVE G F B121D929 WMF A stepper motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners A B The 1st scanner is driven by the scanner drive motor C drive gear through the timing belt D scanner drive pulley E scanner drive shaft F and two timing belts G The 2nd scanner is driven through the 1st scanner and two timing belts H Book mode The BICU controls and operates the scanner drive motor In full size mode the 1st scanner speed is 100 mm s during scanning The 2nd scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner In reduction or enlargement mode the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio The returning speed is always the same whether in full size or magnification mode The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner drive motor speed and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BICU board Magnification in the sub scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive motor speed using SP4 008 Magnificatio
208. ltage required To compensate the machine uses the ID sensor to measure the effects of current environmental conditions For this measurement the process control parameters are balanced so that any small change in drum potential caused by environmental effects is reflected in a change in the amount of toner transferred to the drum This measurement is made immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner density control Immediately after making ID sensor pattern A the charge roller voltage stays the same but the development bias goes up to 600 V as a result the drum potential is reduced to 650 V The laser diode is not switched on and the drum potential is now slightly higher than the development bias so a very small amount of toner transfers to the drum The ID sensor measures the density of this pattern B and the output voltage is known as Vsdp This voltage is compared with Vsg read from the bare drum at the same time 6 35 DRUM CHARGE 1 December 2003 If the humidity drops the drum potential goes up to a higher ve voltage even if the charge roller voltage supply stays the same efficiency of voltage transfer is higher with lower humidity As a result less toner is transferred to ID sensor pattern B If the sensor output reaches a certain point the drum charge voltage will be reduced To determine whether to change the drum charge roller voltage the machine compares Vsdp with Vsg e Vsdp Vsg gt 0 95
209. machine To select an item on the LCD touch the appropriate button on the soft touch screen of the LCD or press the appropriate number key on the 10 key pad of the operation panel For example Exit 0 displayed on the screen means you can touch the Exit button on the screen or press the 9 button on the operation panel of the copier Before starting the firmware update procedure always make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress 1 December 2003 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 5 2 2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 1 3 With the label on the SD card B facing Turn off the main power switch Remove the slot cover A x 1 as shown in the diagram insert the SD card into the lower slot C on the controller box D Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place Make sure the SD card is locked in place NOTE To remove the SD push it in to unlock the spring lock and then release it so it pops out of the slot D If the machine is connected to a network disconnect the network cable from the copier B1218915 WMF Switch the main power switch on After about 10 seconds the initial version update screen appears on the LCD in English FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR MFP MACHINES 1 December 2003 7 Select a module To scroll through the menus Program UpDate Menu
210. mbers In addition you use the optional operation panel to type other characters When you press the ABC key the letter changes as follows A gt B C To input the same letter two times for example AA you press the ABC key the Space key and the ABC key To switch between uppercase letters and lowercase letters press the Shift key Serial Number and NVRAM Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared You must specify a serial number after you replace the NVRAM SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5 1 11 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD DOWNLOAD SP5 824 825 This procedure is for the basic machine only NCAUTION Make sure that you turn off the main switch before inserting or removing a flash memory card Installing or removing a flash memory card while the main switch is on may damage the BiCU or memory Overview NOU eal COPY ME Gale tie SP5 824 1 From the BICU to a flash NVRAM to a flash memory card NVRAM Upload memory card NVRAM Upload or from a flash memory to the sps 825 4 From a flash memory download NVRAM Download card to the BICU You should execute NVRAM Upload before replacing the NVRAM or before executing SP5 801 2 Memory Clear Engine 5 1 7 You copy back the data from the flash card to the NVRAM as necessary NVRAM Upload SP5 824 1 1 Turn off the main switch 2 Remove the card cover B 1 riv
211. mode Use the e5 key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment Trailing Erase 3 0 3 0 1 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode Use the e key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment StoS Rear Regist 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for the rear side of duplex originals for ADF mode Use the 62 key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment Sub scan Magnif 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 1 step Adjust the sub scan magnification for the ADF ADF Adjustment Original Curl Adj 0 No 1 Yes Enables or disables the skew adjustment for the reverse sides of originals When you enable SP6 006 6 adjust the distance of the skew adjustment SP6 006 7 ADF Adjustment Skew Correction 20 20 0 1 mm step Specifies the distance of the skew adjustment SP6 006 7 is effective when you enable SP6 006 6 ADF Adjustment Original Curl Adj 6009 ADF Free Run 6009 1 Performs an ADF free run Press ON to start press OFF to stop Stamp Position Adjustment 10 10 0 1 mm step Adjusts the stamp position in the sub scan direction for the fax mode 6901 Display ADF APS 6901 1 Displays the status of the ADF original size sensors r 5 1 17 ADF Shading Time 0 60 10 1 s step Adjusts the interval used for t
212. mptom SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Possible Cause 868 B SD card access error 2 Incorrect data is detected in the SD card e SD card defective e SD controller defective Address Book Data Error Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network e Software defective FCU Flash ROM Error The address book written into the flash ROM mounted on the FCU is detected as defective e Flash ROM device defective e Replace flash ROM on the MBU Electrical total counter error The electrical total counter does not work properly e NVRAM on the GW controller board defective Mechanical total counter The mechanical total counter does not work properly e Mechanical total counter defective e BICU defective e Disconnected mechanical total counter Engine total counter error 5 5 50 58 Fw The checksum of the total counter is not correct e NVRAM on the BICU defective Printer error A fatal error is detected in the printer application program e Printer application program defective e Hardware configuration incorrect including memory shortage Printer font error Necessary font files are not found e Font file not installed Net file error The net file management file contains a fatal error e Data corruption Memory error The machine de
213. n and tray holder arm in the same manner 9 By pass tray E 3 9 EXTERIOR COVERS amp OPERATION PANEL 1 December 2003 3 3 11 LEFT LOWER COVER TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 1 Left lower cover A amp x 2 B121R908 WMF 3 3 12 RIGHT LOWER COVER TWO TRAY MODELS ONLY 1 Open the right lower cover A 2 Right lower cover 1 rivet B121R949 WMF 3 3 13 PLATEN COVER SENSOR 1 Top rear cover 3 3 4 2 Platen cover sensor A x 1 B121R909 WMF 1 December 2003 SCANNER UNIT 3 4 SCANNER UNIT 3 4 4 EXPOSURE GLASS DF EXPOSURE GLASS te 96 os O0 5 5 9 lt 474 B121R950 WMF Exposure Glass Front upper left cover er 3 3 4 Left scale A x 2 Rear scale B amp x 3 Exposure glass C NOTE When reinstalling make sure that the mark is at the rear left corner and that the left edge is aligned to the support on the frame Toe m DF Exposure Glass 1 Front upper left cover er 3 3 4 2 Left scale A DF exposure glass D NOTE When reinstalling make sure that the mark E is on the bottom SCANNER UNIT 1 December 2003 3 4 2 LENS BLOCK CAUTION 1 Do not touch the paint locked screws on the lens block The position E Mia 4 After installing a new lens block adjust the image quality 3 13 of the lens assembly black part is adjusted before shipment 2 Do not grasp the PCB or the lens assembly when handling the lens block The
214. n in the main scan direction can be adjusted using SP4 009 ADF mode The scanners are always kept at their home position the scanner H P sensor I detects the 1st scanner to scan the original The ADF motor feeds the original through the ADF In reduction enlargement mode the image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed Magnification in the main scan direction is done in the BICU board like for book mode Magnification in the sub scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor speed using SP6 006 005 In the main scan direction it can be adjusted with SP4 009 like for book mode 1 December 2003 SCANNING 6 4 3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE B121D930 WMF In the optics cavity for original size detection there are four reflective sensors The original width sensors A detect the original width and the original length sensors B detect the original length These are the APS Auto Paper Select sensors Each APS sensor is a reflective photosensor While the main switch is on these sensors are active and the original size data is always sent to the CPU However the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor C is activated This is when the platen is positioned about 15 cm above the exposure glass for example while it is being closed The CPU can recognize the original size from the combination of on off signals from the APS sensors o
215. ncorrect localization setting e NVRAM defective Print image transfer error Print images are not transferred e Controller defective e BICU board defective e Poor connection between controller and BICU Software performance error The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation Software defective Internal parameter incorrect Insufficient working memory When this SC occurs the file name address and data will be stored in NVRAM This information can be checked by using SP7 403 Note the above data and the situation in which this SC occurs Then report the data and conditions to your technical control center Software continuity error The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation However unlike SC990 the object of the error is continuity of the software No operation required This SC code does not appear on the panel and is only logged Unexpected Software Error Software encountered an unexpected operation not defined under any SC code Software defective An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred Application function selection error The application selected by a key press on operation panel does not start or ends abnormally 4 10 Download the firmware for the application that failed An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed 1 December 2003 No Definition Symptom SERVICE C
216. ner 5 38 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Line Width Correction Adjusts the line width correction algorithm Positive settings produce thicker lines negative settings produce thinner lines This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 wr 6 5 4 Line Width Correction Copy 2 2 0 1 step Line Width Correction Fax Line Width Correction Scanner Independent Dot Erase Selects the dot erase level Higher settings provide greater erasure This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 er 6 5 4 Independent Dot Erase Copy 2 2 0 1 step Independent Dot Erase Fax Independent Dot Erase Scanner Positive Negative 0 No 1 Yes Inverts white and black This setting is only applied to the originals in 5 4 921 er 6 5 4 Positive Negative Copy Positive Negative Fax Sharpness Edge 2 2 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4 921 6 5 4 Sharpness Edge Copy Sharpness Edge Fax Sharpness Edge Scanner Sharpness Solid 2 2 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in 5 4 921 6 5 4 Sharpness Solid Copy Sharpness Solid Fax Sharpness Solid Scanner Sharpness Low ID 2 2 0 1 step Adjust the clarity This setting is only applied to the originals in 5 4 921 6 5 4 Sharpness Low ID Co
217. ner falls down into the development unit through the slit and the shutter 6 42 1 December 2003 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL Overview There are four modes for controlling toner supply as shown in the following tables which can be changed with by SP2 921 The factory setting is sensor control 1 mode Basically the toner concentration in the developer is controlled using the standard TD sensor voltage Vts toner supply reference voltage Vref actual TD sensor output voltage Vt and ID sensor output data Vsp Vsg Toner Supply Motor On Time Calculation TD Sensor Output Vt Vt Reference Voltage Vref 75 New Vref Vt Reference Voltage Update ID Sensor Output Vsp Vsg TD Sensor Initial Setting Vts o Xs Ss 59 3 B121D949 WMF 6 43 DEVELOPMENT 1 December 2003 The four toner density control modes are as follows Mode Sensor control 1 SP2 921 0 Normally use this setting only Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage Vts or Vref Toner control process Toner is supplied to the development unit when Vt is higher than the reference voltage Vts or Vref This mode keeps the Vref value for use with the next toner density control Vts is used for the first toner density control after a new PCU has been installed until it has be
218. ng The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor Upper Paper End The Paper End indicator lights when the 1st Open paper tray is selected even if there is paper in the tray The Paper End indicator does not light when the 1st paper tray is selected even if there is no Shorted paper in the tray The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made from the 1st paper tray The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made from an optional paper tray unit The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor Lower Paper End The Paper End indicator lights when the 2nd Open paper tray is selected even if there is paper in the tray B122 B123 models only The Paper End indicator does not light when the 2nd paper tray is selected even if there is Shorted no paper in the tray The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made from the 2nd paper tray B122 B123 models only Shorted Shorted Vertical Transport Opel Shorted Shorted By pass Paper The Paper End indicator lights when the bypass End Open tray is selected even if there is paper in the tray The Paper End indicator does not light when the bypass tray is selected even if there is no Shorted paper in the tray The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made from the bypass tray The Paper Jam message will appear whenever Open a copy is made paper hasn t reached th
219. nnector C Scanner left lid D x 7 Sensor tape E Pri OF eec UR Scanner home position sensor F SCANNER UNIT B121R911 WMF te 96 os o0 5 5 9 lt r4 B121R958 WMF SCANNER UNIT 1 December 2003 3 4 7 ADJUSTING SCANNER POSITIONS NCAUTION Grasp the front and rear ends not the middle of the first scanner when you manually move it The first scanner may be damaged if you press push or pull its middle part Overview Adjust the scanner positions when the first scanner C and second scanner B are not parallel with the side frames A or when you have replaced one or more of the scanner belts To adjust the scanner positions do either of the following B121R959 WMF e To adjust the belt contact points on the first scanner er Adjusting the First Scanner Contact Points e To adjust the belt contact points on the scanner bracket er Adjusting the Second Scanner Contact Points G H B121R913 WMF The two actions above have the same objectives to align the following holes and marks The adjustment holes H J in the first scanner e The adjustment holes H J in the second scanner e The alignment marks on the frames The scanner positions are correct when these holes and marks are aligned 1 December 2003 SCANNER UNIT Adjusting the First Scanner Contact Points Ove O 8 9 D B te 96 os O0 5 5
220. no tes ces ene rtt tette tette tette odii oet 5 75 Reading the Dalai DE DE DU DE DE Db mi nt mph eL ntt 5 75 5 1 7 MEMORY CLEAR a ais 5 76 Basic Machine and 5 76 EXCBDU OIS Te aa Drag ad dude ae Dad aa aUo 5 76 With Flash Memory Card Basic Machine Only 5 77 Without Flash Memory 5 77 5 1 8 INPUT CHECK SP5 803 e pend ess 5 78 Conducting an Input 5 78 Input Check Fables cna 5 78 5 1 9 OUTPUT CHECK SP5 804 eee Ie eed 5 80 Conducting an Output Check uie cec 5 80 Output Check T3bl8s 2 2 ie ot pe Don pd mus od 5 80 5 1 10 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT 5 5 811 5 81 Specifying Characters tee Pe Reo ex 5 81 Serial Number and NVRAM 2 222220200011 5 81 5 1 11 DATA UPLOAD DOWNLOAD SP5 824 825 5 82 vl 5 82 NVRAM Upload 5 5 824 1 5 82 Download 5 5 825 1 5 83 5 1 12 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR BASIC MACHI
221. nsfer current level used for the paper feed trays duplex tray by pass tray and cleaning an be adjusted Be careful when increasing the transfer current This may cause a ghosting effect Bv Tr Paper Tray By pass Tray Duplex Duplex Thick OHP Special jr side 2nd Side Normal Envelope A3 A4 LEF 11 uA 12 uA 13 uA 12 uA 17 uA DLT 12 uA 18 uA 15 uA 18 uA 17 uA 4 SEF 12 uA 12 uA 15 uA 12 uA 18 uA LT SEF 17 uA 17 uA 15 uA 17 uA 24 uA A4 SEF 21 uA 15 uA 28 uA 15 uA 24 uA B5 SEF 22 uA 19 uA 28 uA 19 uA 22 uA A5 SEF 22 uA 19 uA 28 uA 19 uA 28 uA HLT SEF 22 uA 19 uA 28 uA E B6 SEF 22 uA 19 uA 28 uA A6 SEF 22 uA 19 uA 34 uA Post mE PANI TRAE zi in which part of the image at the top of the page is repeated lower down the page at a lower density In the worst case it may also damage the OPC drum 6 57 Detailed Descriptions IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 1 December 2003 6 12 3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING If the paper size is smaller than the image or if a paper jam occurs during printing toner may be transferred to the roller surface To prevent the toner from transferring to the back side of the printouts the transfer roller requires cleaning before the next printing run During transfer roller cleaning the high voltage supply unit supplies a negative cleaning voltage
222. ntally touched it wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton and then wipe it dry with a cloth Never use alcohol to clean the drum Alcohol will dissolve the drum surface Store the PCU in a cool dry place Do not expose the drum to corrosive gases ammonia etc Do not shake a used PCU as this may cause toner and developer to spill out Dispose of used PCU components in accordance with local regulations te 96 os o0 55 og r4 QI OV de oo Do 3 1 2 TRANSFER ROLLER 1 Never touch the surface of the transfer roller with bare hands 2 Be careful not to scratch the transfer roller as the surface is easily damaged 3 1 3 SCANNER UNIT 1 Use alcohol or glass cleaner to clean the exposure and scanning glass This will reduce the static charge on the glass 2 Use a blower brush or a water moistened cotton pad to clean the mirrors and lenses 3 Take care not to bend or crease the exposure lamp s ribbon cable 4 Do not disassemble the lens unit Doing so will throw the lens and copy image out of focus 5 Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws Doing so will throw the CCD out of position 3 1 GENERAL CAUTIONS 1 December 2003 3 1 4 LASER UNIT 1 Do not loosen or adjust the screws securing the LD drive board on the LD unit Doing so will throw the LD unit out of adjustment Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit These are adjusted at the factory The polygon
223. ode when it occurs The table lists the status of several components For the fusing temperature see section 6 13 5 Operation panel Exhaust fan Operating Mode On On Low Power Mode Off Off Transit Mode Off Off Night Off Mode Off Off The Operating Mode here refers to all the modes or status other than the Low Power Mode and Night Off Mode Actual power consumption during the Operating Mode depends on job status and environmental conditions The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller kk AOF See AOF in section 6 15 6 74 1 December 2003 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES Timers The Energy Saver Timer and Auto Off Timer start at the same time to when the machine ends all jobs when the user ends all manual operations or when the controller starts the default application program the program specified by the user e gt System Settings gt General Features gt Function Priority The default application program starts when the System Auto Reset Timer expires gt System Settings gt Timer Settings gt System Auto Reset Timer For more information see Timers in section 6 15 Recovery Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode e The power switch is pressed e Originals are set on the document feeder e The platen cover or document feeder is opened e The controller receives a job over the network or the tele
224. oeg Ayolig AJOL JeuuoN punoJByoeg ojoud 1 2 JEU JON pa1oJo5 Jeioeds epoui qS Buisn eq jouueo eu ease Aesp 3 LON B121D920 WMF 6 19 IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 Auto Shading Overview There are two auto shading methods black level correction and white level correction Auto shading corrects errors in the signal level for each pixel Black and white level correction is always done Black Level Correction The IPU detects the black dummy data from one end of the CCD signal 32 pixels at the end are blacked off and takes the average of the black dummy data Then the black level value from each image pixel is detected White Level Correction Previous machines used 8 bit data 256 gradations but this machine uses 6 bit data 64 gradations When white level correction is applied to 8 bit data white lines are more easily generated This is because the normal variations in CCD pixel response which are very slight when rounded off by white level correction will show up much easier on the copy when the data is divided into 256 gradations Before scanning the original the machine reads a reference waveform from the white plate The average of the white video level for each pixel is stored as the white shading data in the FI
225. om the by pass tray 7504 60 Counter Each P Jam Off Regist Duplex Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse side printing for duplex printing 7504 70 Counter Each P Jam On Regist SN Paper is caught at the registration sensor 7504 120 Counter Each P Jam On Exit SN Paper is caught at the exit sensor previous page 7504 121 Counter Each P Jam Off Exit SN Paper does not reach the exit sensor 7504 122 Counter Each P Jam On Exit SN Paper is caught at the exit sensor 5 20 1 December 2003 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 7504 123 Counter Each P Jam Off Dup Inverter Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor from the registration roller 7504 125 Counter Each P Jam On Dup Inverter Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor 7504 126 Counter Each P Jam Off Dup Entrance Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor 7504 127 Counter Each P Jam Off Dup Entrance Paper is caught at the duplex entrance sensor 7504 128 Counter Each P Jam Off Duplex Exit Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor 7504 129 Counter Each P Jam On Duplex Exit Paper is caught at the duplex exit sensor Counter Each O Jam 0 9999 0 1 step Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred at a certain timing or at a certain locat
226. on Start the SP mode Select SP5 302 002 and specify the time zone Select SP5 307 001 003 and 004 and specify the daylight saving time settings DIS E RN am a Step 11 Fax Settings 1 Select fax SP1 101 016 and specify the system switch 2 Select fax SP3 101 001 and specify the service station 1 40 1 December 2003 IEEE1284 IEEE1394 INTERFACE 1 13 IEEE1284 IEEE1394 INTERFACE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure NOTE 1 Before installing the IEEE 1284 interface install the optional printer scanner 2 One slot is available You can install one of the IEEE 1284 interface IEEE1394 interface wireless LAN interface and Bluetooth interface 2 15 T 1 Remove slot cover A x 2 2 Install the interface board B 2 x 2 RN ut E GS Ti 75 See oN B6821905 WMF 1 41 IEEE1284 IEEE1394 INTERFACE 1 December 2003 1 13 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories Description Wireless LAN card Wireless LAN card cover Wireless LAN board 1 13 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure NOTE 1 Before installing the optional wireless LAN IEEE 802 116 install the optional printer scanner 2 One slot is available You can install one of the IEEE 1284 interface IEEE1394 interface wi
227. oor Toner bottle holder er 3 6 1 Toner supply motor A x 1 mu oe B121R977 WMF 3 8 PAPER FEED SECTION 3 8 1 PAPER FEED ROLLER 1 Paper cassette 2 Clip A 3 Push the shaft back through the opening and tilt it up NOTE If the black plastic bushing B comes off be sure to remount it when reinstalling the shaft 4 Paper feed roller C 3 8 2 FRICTION PAD B121R978 1 Paper cassette 2 Clip D 3 Push the shaft back through the opening so that the roller moves clear of the friction pad 4 Friction pad E B121R979 WMF 1 December 2003 PAPER FEED SECTION 3 8 3 PAPER END SENSOR 1 Paper cassette 2 Paper end sensor F x 1 3 8 4 EXIT SENSOR te 96 os O0 55 Q FT 95 474 Non duplex Models Open the right door Front right cover er 3 3 7 Guide A x 2 Exit sensor bracket B x 1 Exit sensor C x 1 GE e IA qusc C B121R920 WMF Duplex Models Open the right door Front right cover er 3 3 7 Upper guide D x 2 Exit sensor bracket E x 1 Exit sensor F x 1 GU obe OM I E B121R919 WMF PAPER FEED SECTION 1 December 2003 3 8 5 BY PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENSOR B121R981 WMF 1 By pass tray er 3 3 10 NOTE If you have a support to keep the by pass tray within the reach of the connector cable you do not need to disconnect the connector When you
228. ore e ADF main board defective The BICU receives a break signal from BICU defective the ADF main board ADF connection error An incorrect ADF an ADF for some e ADF incorrect The ADF for other copier is detected for Basic and B039 B040 B043 is installed on a MFP machines B121 B122 B123 An ADF including the correct ADF is e The connector of the ADF is removed installed while the copier is in the while the machine is in the energy energy saver mode for MFP machine saver mode only Accounting error 1 An error is detected during the e Accounting device defective communication with the MF accounting e Loose connection device Accounting error 2 After communication is established with e Accounting device defective the MF accounting device a brake e Loose connection signal is issued Accounting RAM error An error is detected in the RAM that e Accounting device defective saves the information on the MF accounting Accounting battery error An error is detected in the battery that e Accounting device defective is in the MF accounting device 4 6 1 December 2003 No Definition Symptom SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Possible Cause 670 C Engine start error The engine ready signal is not issued within 70 seconds after the switch is turned on e Engine board defective e Controller defective e Loose connection ADF gate abnormal 1 The A
229. otor C drives the fusing unit through a gear train and drives the paper exit rollers A through the timing belt B Drive Release Mechanism When the right door I is open the spring pushes the top end of the gear holder F to the right The drive gear is released from the fusing unit drive gear J When you close the right door the mechanical link H pushes the spring G The gear holder turns counterclockwise by the force of another spring D and engages with the fusing unit drive gear Contact Release Control The drive power is not transmitted to the fusing unit Drive Release Solenoid during warming up when the fusing temperature at the start is 18 C or higher The drive power is transmitted when the fusing temperature is less than 18 C This contact release control is based on the following fact The hot roller L takes a shorter time to become Fusing Temp Contact Release hot enough if it is not turning during warming up When however the fusing temperature at the start is low the temperature of the hot roller Less than 18 C Contact surface may become uneven You can disable this control e SP1 103 001 18 C or higher Release 1 December 2003 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT Drive Release Solenoid The fusing drive release solenoid E is on the rear Solenoid Drive gear end of the gear holder When the solenoid is off the spring D pulls the gear holder and the drive gear engages with the f
230. pecification is 100 1 0 e Main scan magnification is implemented in steps of 0 5 Accordingly your input value should be a multiple of 0 5 1 0 0 5 0 0 5 or 1 0 Leading Edge Registration Scanner 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode wr 3 13 2 The image moves toward the leading edge e The image moves toward the trailing edge The specification is 2 1 5 mm Side to side Registration Scanner 4 2 4 2 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for scanning in platen mode wr 3 13 2 e Increasing the value shifts the image to the right e The specification is 2 1 5 mm Scan Erase Margin Adjusts the scanning margin individually for each of the four edges It is generally best to adjust the scanning margin as little as possible and use the printing margin for image adjustments Leading edge 0 9 0 1 0 0 1 mm step Trailing edge Left Right Scanner Free Run Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on Press ON or to start Press OFF to stop White Plate Scanning Start position 3 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate for auto shading The base value stored in the machine is 15 2 mm toward the white plate from the scanner H P This SP setting specifies the offset from this base value Scanning length 3 0 6 0
231. phone line e An SC code is generated o LE Ss 59 3 6 75 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Configuration Copy Process Originals Original Size Copy Paper Size Copy Paper Weight Reproduction Ratios Zoom Desktop Dry electrostatic transfer system Sheet Book Object Maximum A3 11 x 17 Maximum A3 11 x 17 Minimum A5 LEF 81 2 x 51 2 Paper tray A6 SEF 51 2 x 81 2 Bypass Custom sizes in the bypass tray Width 90 297 mm 3 55 11 69 Length 148 600 mm 5 83 23 62 NOTE Physically the by pass tray can handle the following size but this size is not recognized by the application software Width 305 mm Length 1 260 mm Paper Tray 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib Bypass 52 162 g m 14 43 Ib 3 enlargement and 4 reduction A4 A3 Version LT DLT Version 200 155 Enlargement 141 129 122 121 Full Size 100 100 93 78 Reduction 6596 50 50 to 200 in 1 steps SPEC 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1 December 2003 Power Source Taiwan 110 V 60 Hz 12A Korea 220 V 60 Hz North and South America 120 V 60 Hz 12A Europe Asia 220 240 V 50 60 Hz Power Consumption Full System Not above 1 28 kW Energy Saver Not above 10 W Off Mode Not above 1 W NOTE Full system Maximum possible power consumption any combination of
232. play 5914 Application Counter Display 0 Off 1 On 5914 1 Printer Counter Selects whether or not these total counters are displayed in 5914 3 Copy Counter the UP mode A3 DLT Counter Display 0 Off 1 On Sets the key press display for the counter key This setting has no relation to SSP SP5 104 A3 DLT Double Count SSP Debug Serial Output DFU 0 Off 1 On 5970 machine is powered on Cherry Server 0 Lite 1 Full Switches writing between the Scan Router Lite application provided and the optional full Professional version 5 52 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5990 SMC Print 7 59501 5990 1 All Data Lis DEP CR SP Mode Data List a User Program EE Logging Data LN Diagnostic Repor p Non Defaul NIB Summary RII Copier User Program RII Scanner SP e J 5990 23 Scanner User Program 5998 Memory Clear 59981 5 1 7 5 53 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP6 XXX Peripherals ADF Adjustment 3 13 3 NOTE Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration ADF Adjustment StoS Front Regist 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the side to side registration for the front side of the original for ADF mode Use the key to select or before entering the value ADF Adjustment Leading Regist 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF
233. pply determination see below Vref is determined using the following data e ID sensor output Vsp Vsg e Vts or the current Vref Vt Toner Supply Determination The reference voltage Vts or Vref is the threshold voltage for determining whether or not to supply toner If Vt becomes greater than the reference voltage the machine supplies additional toner This can be checked using SP2 220 6 45 DEVELOPMENT 1 December 2003 Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations For fixed control mode the toner supply motor on time is specified by the setting of SP2 925 and does not vary The default setting is 200 ms for each copy The toner supply motor on time for each value of SP2 925 is as follows Value of SP2 925 Motor On Time t 200 ms t 2t 4t at 12t 16t Continuously Not supplied For sensor control modes 1 and 2 the toner supply motor on time is decided by the following factors e Vt e Vref or Vts TD sensor sensitivity coefficient S value is 0 4 There are seven levels for toner supply motor on time as shown below Decision Motor On Time seconds Vts or Vref lt Vt lt Vts or Vref 5 16 t 0 4 Vts or Vref lt Vt lt Vts or Vref 5 8 tx 2 0 8 Vts or Vref lt Vt lt Vts or Vref 5 4 tx 4 1 6 Vts or Vref lt Vt lt Vts or Vref S 2 t x 8 3 2 Vts or Vref lt Vt lt Vts or Vref 45 5 t x 16
234. py Sharpness Low ID Fax Sharpness Low ID Scanner 5 39 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 White Line Erase 0 2 1 1 step Selects the white line erase level 6 5 4 0 None 1 Weak 2 Strong e This setting is effective only Photo 1 Photo 3 Special 3 or Special 4 mode e 0 White line erase is not used and white level correction is used instead e This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 Black Line Erase 0 3 2 1 step Selects the black line erase level This setting is effective only when originals are scanned by the A R DF 6 5 4 O No 1 Very weak 2 Weak 3 Strong This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4 921 5 40 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE SP5 XXX Mode All Indicators On All LEDs turn on The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds Press the reset key to end this program SSP 5044 Operation Panel Bit Switch DFU A3 DLT Double Count 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 Disabled if the size is undetected Selects whether the machine counts twice for each sheet of A3 11 x 17 If this is set to Yes is selected the total mechanical counter and the current user counter will both increment by two for each A3 11 x 17 sheet Optional Counter Type 0 None 5 MF key card Peace Japan Only 11 MF key card Increment 12 MF key card Decrement 51
235. r of zero cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the fusing lamp power to 10096 while bringing the lamp up to the standby temperature or while copying Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts 6 13 5 Warm Up Soft Start 0 10 cycles 1 20 cycles 2 50 cycles Other Soft Start 0 5 cycles 1 10 cycles 2 20 cycles Set Fusing Start 0 15 1 1 5s 2 2s Specifies the interval for fusing temperature control er 6 13 5 1109 Nip Band Check 1109 1 Checks the fusing nip band er 3 10 8 5 4 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Fan Control Timer 30 60 30 1 s step Inputs the fan control time The fan maintains normal speed for the specified time after occurrence of an SC or following entry into Warm up mode Low Power mode or Night Off mode Display AC Freq Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency as detected by the zero cross signal generator The displayed value is 1 5 the actual frequency 10 50 Hz 12 60 Hz Feed Clutch Boost Adjusts the amount of extra push that the feed clutch gives to the paper after the skew has been corrected at registration This feature helps the registration roller feed certain types of paper such as thick paper Increase the value if thick paper is jamming after feeding from the registration roller By pass tray 0 10 6 1 mm step 2nd 3rd 4th tray 0
236. r on the ends of the hot roller Fusing Soft Start Adjusts the number of zero cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the fusing lamp power to 10096 while bringing the lamp up to the standby temperature or while copying Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts er 6 13 5 Warm Up Soft Start 0 10 cycles 1 20 cycles 2 50 cycles Other Soft Start 0 5 cycles 1 10 cycles 2 20 cycles Set Fusing Start Specifies the interval for fusing temperature control er 6 13 5 0 18 1 1 5s 2 28 1109 Nip Band Check 1109 1 Checks the fusing nip band er 3 10 8 5 28 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Fan Control Timer 30 60 30 1 s step Inputs the fan control time The fan maintains normal speed for the specified time after occurrence of an SC or following entry into Warm up mode Low Power mode or Night Off mode Display AC Freq Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency as detected by the zero cross signal generator The displayed value is 1 5 the actual frequency 10 50 Hz 12 60 Hz Feed Clutch Boost Adjusts the amount of extra push that the feed clutch gives to the paper after the skew has been corrected at registration This feature helps the registration roller feed certain types of paper such as thick paper Increase the value if thick paper is jamming after feeding from the regis
237. reless LAN interface and Bluetooth interface 1 Remove the slot cover A x 2 2 Install the wireless LAN IEEE 802 11b board B x 2 3 Reattach the rear cover B6821901 WMF 1 42 1 December 2003 IEEE1284 IEEE1394 INTERFACE 4 With the card label facing left insert the card A into the PCI slot e 5 15 T a 5 Attach the cover B E A x P B B6821902 WMF 6 If reception is poor you may need to move the machine e Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that can generate a strong magnetic field Position the machine as close as possible to the access point 1 43 IEEE1284 IEEE1394 INTERFACE 1 December 2003 UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802 11b These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on NOTE The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used 1 Press the User Tools Counter key 2 Onthe touch panel press System Settings NOTE The Network I F default Ethernet must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN Select Interface Settings Network tab LAN Type Select either Ethernet or IEEE 802 11b Press IEEE 802 11b Only the wireless LAN options are displayed Transmission Mode Select either Ad Hoc Mode or Infrastructure Mode
238. remove the bracket remove the screw at the middle of the crosspiece see step 6 5 Main motor 3 12 4 fp Fera ceto PPP WF 6 Crosspiece D 2 x 3 7 Registration clutch er 3 8 8 B121R938 WMF 3 49 OTHER REPLACEMENTS 1 December 2003 8 PCU er 3 6 1 NOTE This step releases the gear on the gearbox that drives the PCU 9 Ground plate A 7 x 2 10 Gearbox B x 5 1 belt B121R504 WMF B121R939 WMF B121R940 WMF When reassembling do not change the position of the spring C and check that the bushing D on the PCU drive shaft is in the correct position You can adjust its position by rotating the gear E seen from the opening of the gearbox 1 December 2003 OTHER REPLACEMENTS Gear Arrangement in the Gearbox te 96 os O0 55 9 lt 474 B121R944 WMF The gears are numbered 1 to 12 in the order in which they are to be installed in the gearbox These numbers appear both on the gearbox and on the front exposed surface of each gear If the gears fall out start by finding gear number 1 and installing it onto location number 1 setting it into place so that the side with the printed number remains visible Then install the remaining gears 2 to 12 in the same way COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING 1 December 2003 3 13 COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING NOTE 1 You need to perform the adjustment after executing a Memory All Clear
239. riginal mode the settings from SP4 922 to SP4 932 will be applied to e 4 922 Selects the scanner y curve You can select either a curve for text based originals brings out text or a curve for photo originals better distinctions between shades of dark colors 4 923 Selects the central notch position for the ID adjustment LEDs 4 926 Adjusts the texture removal level used with error diffusion 4 927 Adjusts the line width 4 928 Selects the dot erase level 4 929 Converts white to black and black to white 4 930 Adjusts the clarity of line images and the edges of solid images 4 931 Adjusts the clarity of solid image areas 4 932 Adjusts the clarity of low ID lines 4 941 Selects the white line erase level e 4 942 Selects the black line erase level If a fax and or scanner printer option is installed you can make separate settings for copier fax and scanner printer mode with these SPs IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 suonduo segq perejeq uonoeuo 1ejuud uonoe02 peiqeua JONUOD seur1 GOL uoisnylq uorsnyip uoisnylq seur1 9 4043 10113 926 vdS 20 9 uoisnilg 10413 2019 uonoel02 oBeu Ojoud exid
240. ring is positioned at the end D as the default setting B121D968 WMF 1 December 2003 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 6 13 5 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL Overview A SS ae Qus There are two fusing lamps not identical two thermistors and four thermostats The fusing temperature is controlled using the thermistors A B121D902 WMF The CPU checks the output from the fusing thermistor once every 1 5 seconds The CPU decides how long the lamps must be switched on during the next 1 5 seconds by comparing the following temperatures e The center thermistor temperature and the target center temperature e The end thermistor temperature and the target end temperature The fusing lamp works to maintain a target fusing temperature of 160 C during copying o LE Ss 3 3 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 1 December 2003 Temperature Control According to the operation mode the fusing temperature is controlled The diagram illustrates the transition of fusing temperature After you turn the main switch on the fusing temperature rises from the room temperature to to one of the specified temperatures You can adjust some of the temperatures Temperature Regular Start Cold Start UPPER CASE Adjustable by SP lower case Not adjustable B121D910 WMF A1 Regular Start Mode A2 Cold Start Mode SP1 107 1 2 Turning the fusing lamp on and off may affect the voltage of the power source in t
241. round on the rear side 6 12 2 Forced Developer Churning Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output Vt The machine mixes the developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value The machine does not initialize the TD sensor output If the machine has not been used for a long period of time prints may have a dirty background In this case use this SP mode to mix the developer The message Completed is displayed when the program ends normally Tailing Correction Shift value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 mm step Shifts the image writing position in intervals specified by SP2 906 2 When making many copies of an original that contains vertical lines such as in tables the paper may not separate correctly This can cause tailing images ghosts of the vertical lines continuing past the bottom of the table This SP can be used to prevent this Interval 1 10 1 1 page step Changes the interval for the image shift specified by SP2 906 1 5 31 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Forced Toner Supply Forces the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit Press 1 to start The machine continues to supply toner until the toner concentration in the development unit reaches the standard level or for up to 2 minutes whichever comes first Polygon Mirror Motor Idling Time 0 None 1 15s 2 25s Selects the polygon mirror motor id
242. s switched on for MDN reply mail 5860 22 SMTP Auth From Field Replacement 0 No 1 Yes Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated 5869 RAM Disk 5869 1 Enables or disables the use of the RAM disk 5 51 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5870 Common Key Info 5870 1 Common Key Info Writing Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications SSP Common Key Info Initialize 5870 3 Initializes the area for the key information 5873 5873 1 SD Card Application Transport Transports the application programs 5873 2 SD Card Application Transport Redo Eds Nullifies the processing of SP5 873 1 5902 Test Pattern Print 59021 5 1 13 Plug amp Play Setting Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function These names are registered in the NVRAM If the NVRAM becomes defective these names should be re registered Use the right arrow or left arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names To select a brand name press the OK key An asterisk indicates which manufacture is currently selected 5 1 7 Switchover Permission Time 3 30 3 1 s Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode and the operation panel keys have not been used before another application can gain control of the dis
243. s the relay cable through the opening G and reinstall the left cover Install the stepped screw H een Join the connectors Pass the joined connectors through the opening of the key counter holder assembly K and put the connectors inside the assembly Hook the key counter holder assembly onto the stepped screw H Check that the cable is not caught between the left cover and the key counter holder assembly Secure the key counter holder assembly with the screw L 1 December 2003 MFP EXPANSION 1 12 MFP EXPANSION The controller box and the fax unit contain lithium batteries The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace fe 5 5 5 72 only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations This section 1 12 includes the installation procedures for the optional controller box optional printer scanner and optional fax See each step as necessary Machine Configuration Reference Component Panel and Key Settings Printer scanner Steps 1525 Steps 6 gt 7 Steps 10 Printer scanner PostScript 3 Steps152 535 Steps 6 gt 7 Steps 10 Fax Steps154 5 Steps 6 gt 8 Steps 10 gt 11 Printer scanner Fax Steps 1525495 Steps 6 gt 9 Steps 10 gt 11 Printer scanner PostScript 3 Fax Steps1 5 25 3545 Steps6 gt 9 Steps 1
244. sor G B121R998 WMF 3 43 DUPLEX UNIT DUPLEX MODELS ONLY 1 December 2003 3 11 3 DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR me e Ioue B121R931 WMF Copy tray A 2 x 2 Exit cover B x 1 Sensor bracket C 2 x 1 EP x 1 Duplex inverter sensor D x 1 3 44 1 December 2003 DUPLEX UNIT DUPLEX MODELS ONLY 3 11 4 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Open the right door 2 Detach the chain and spring from the A frame and lower the right door 3 Cover x 1 4 Motor bracket B x 4 EB x 1 5 Duplex transport motor C x 2 2 5 os O0 55 9 lt r4 3 11 5 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 2 Exhaust fan er 3 12 5 3 Duplex inverter motor A amp x 2 EB x 1 B121R999 WMF 3 11 6 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD 1 Rear lower cover r3 3 2 2 Duplex control board A x 4 all connectors B121R501 WMF 3 45 OTHER REPLACEMENTS 1 December 2003 3 12 OTHER REPLACEMENTS 3 12 1 QUENCHING LAMP 1 PCU er 3 6 1 2 Quenching lamp A EP x 1 B121R502 WMF 4 Rear cover er 3 3 1 5 High voltage power supply board B x 2 standoffs all connectors B121R932 WMF 3 46 1 December 2003 OTHER REPLACEMENTS 3 12 3 BICU BASE ENGINE IMAGE CONTROL UNIT 1 Rear cover er 3 3 1 2 BICU A 2 x 7 all connectors 2 flat cables When replacing the BICU remove the NVRAM B
245. ssible Cause 145 D Automatic SBU adjustment error During the automatic SBU adjustment the machine detects that the white level read from the white plate or paper is out of range 5 4 428 e Exposure lamp defective e Dirty white plate e Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning er SP4 015 e BICU board defective e SBU board defective Image transfer error Scanned images are not transferred to the controller memory within 1 minute e BICU board defective e Controller board defective Memory address error The BICU board does not receive memory addresses from the controller board e The firmware programs of the engine and the controller do not match e BICU board defective e Controller board defective Charge roller current leak A current leak signal for the charge roller is detected e Charge roller damaged e High voltage supply board defective e Poor connection of the PCU Polygonal mirror motor error The polygon mirror motor does not reach operating speed within 10 seconds after the motor ON signal is sent or does not turn on within one of the 200 ms check intervals during operation 5 5 50 58 Polygon mirror motor defective e Poor connection between the polygonal mirror motor driver and the BICU board e Damaged cable between BICU and polygonal mirror motor driver e BICU board defective No laser writing signal F GATE
246. step By pass feed 0 10 6 1 mm step Duplex 0 20 6 1 mm step SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 1007 Display By pass 1007 1 Display By pass Displays the by pass paper width switch output Fusing Idling This program decides the action of the Fusing Drive Release Mechanism wr 6 13 2 When you select 1 the contact release control is disabled and the drive power is always transmitted to the fusing unit As a result the machine takes a longer time to warm up the fusing unit Use SP1 103 001 if fusing quality is low even when the room temperature is not very low Fusing Idling 0 No 1 Yes Fusing Temperature Adjustment Adjusts the target fusing temperature Center indicates the center of the roller End indicates the front and rear ends 1105 1 Warm Up Center 140 180 160 1 C step 1105 2 Warm Up End 1105 3 Standby Center 140 170 155 1 C step 1105 4 Standby End 140 165 150 1 C step 1105 5 Copying Center 140 185 160 1 C step 1105 6 Copying End 1105 7 Low Level 2 Center 0 80 60 1 C step 1105 8 Low Level 2 End 1105 9 Thick Center 140 185 175 1 C step 1105 10 Thick End 1105 11 Warm Up Low Center 140 180 170 1 C step 1105 12 Warm Up Low End 1106 Display Fusing 1106 1 Displays the fusing temperature Fusing Soft Start Adjusts the numbe
247. stration cannot be adjusted to within the specification then adjust the leading edge blank margin or the left side blank margin 1 Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins and adjust them using the following SP modes SP mode Specification D Trailing edge SP2 101 2 2 2 5 1 5 mm Right edge SP2 101 4 2 2 5 1 5 mm Leading edge SP2 101 1 2 1 5mm Left edge Main Scan Magnification SP2 101 3 A Trailing Edge Blank Margin B Right Edge Blank Margin A C Leading Edge Blank Margin 2 1 5mm f te 96 5E os on 5 5 og r4 D Left Edge Blank Margin B B121R506 WMF 1 Print the single dot grid pattern SP5 902 5 2 Check the magnification the grid size should be 2 7 x 2 7 mm and if necessary use SP2 998 to adjust it The specification is 100 1 3 53 COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING 1 December 2003 3 13 2 SCANNING NOTE 1 Before doing the following scanner adjustments check and adjust the printing leading edge and side to side registrations and the printing blank margins as described above 2 Use an A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments Registration Platen Mode 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the leading edge and side to side registration and adjust as necessary using the following SP modes SP mode Specification Lea
248. t 6 4 6 2 BOARD STRUCTURE 6 5 6 2 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM obiret 6 5 1 BICU Base Engine and Image Control Unit 6 6 2 SBU Sens r B ard oe a iom quts 6 6 6 3 5 6 7 64 SCANNING tutte 6 9 DT OVERVIEW fait nd code ntes diti ceto cute Ce bete eae 6 9 Lamp Stabilizer Fuse sce ipei omoia 6 9 6 4 2 SCANNER DRIVE ents et ot ettet 6 10 6 4 3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE 6 11 6 5 IMAGE PROCESSING trc tte tet Crete decus 6 13 5 5 T OVERVIEW tite E E eto tto bte eaa 6 13 6 5 2 SBU SENSOR BOARD 6 14 6 5 3 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 15 OV SIVIG M 6 15 Image Processing Modes eere prre rn eI 6 16 Image Processing Pall 6 17 Original MOdeS ere at a DE head nh ey eile td 6 18 vi SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step 6 18 A to Shading m 6 20 White Erase 20 9 adhd tas 6 21 Black Wing Erase oio a
249. t erases black lines made by the dust or dirt on the exposure glass The feature is validated default when you specify a value other than 0 in SP4 942 001 When you specify a larger value in this SP the feature erases weaker black lines namely less blacker lines This SP also affects the width of black lines to be erased If you specify 1 or 2 the feature erases the black lines of 1 through 4 pixel width approximately up to 0 17 mm if you specify 3 the feature erases the black lines of 1 through 6 pixel width approximately up to 0 25 mm Note that some black lines on the original may be erased when you specify a larger value in the SP o Ss 3 3 IMAGE PROCESSING 1 December 2003 Auto image density ADS In the SBU ADS prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies As the scanner scans down the page the IPU on the BICU detects the peak white level for each scan line The IPU determines the reference value for the A D conversion for a particular scan line using the peak white level for that scan line Then the IPU sends the reference value data to the reference controller on the SBU When an original with a gray background is scanned the density of the gray area is the peak white level density Therefore the original background will not appear on copies Because peak level data is taken for each scan line ADS corrects for any changes in background density down th
250. tects a discrepancy in the write read data during its write read test done at power off on and at recovery from low power or night off mode e Memory defective e BICU defective e Poor connection between BICU and memory IMAC hardware error A memory control job is not completed within a certain period e IMAC on the GW controller board defective e BICU defective e Poor connection Printer application program error The printer status does not become ready when the printer application program is necessary for image processing e Application program defective Image transfer error The controller is not able to transfer images when the engine needs them 4 9 Application program defective SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS No Definition Symptom 1 December 2003 Possible Cause 964 B Status error laser optics housing unit The optics housing unit does not become ready within 17 seconds after the request e Software defective NVRAM error The machine detects a discrepancy in the NVRAM write read data when attempting to save actual data to the NVRAM i e during actual use e NVRAM defective e Poor connection between BICU and NVRAM e NVRAM is not connected e BICU defective Localization error The localization settings in the nonvolatile ROM and RAM are different SP5 807 1 e First machine start after the NVRAM is replaced e I
251. ter 3 Replacement and Adjustment 9 Refer to the SMC lists and enter any values that differ from the factory settings Double check the values for SP4 901 10 Adjust the standard white level SP4 428 11 Initialize the TD sensor SP 2 214 12 Check the copy quality and the paper path SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 8 INPUT CHECK SP5 803 Conducting an Input Check Select SP5 803 Input Check Table Sensor Switch Select Execute The copy mode is activated The sign 01H or 0OH is displayed see the table below 01H 1 December 2003 Select the number see the table below corresponding to the component 00H Safety SW Open Closed Safety SW LD 5V Open Closed Right Cover SW Open Closed Right Low Cover SW Open Closed Tray Cover SW Open Closed Upper Relay S Paper detected Not detected Lower Relay S Paper detected Not detected Vertical Trans S Paper detected Not detected Registration Sensor Paper detected Not detected Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected Duplex Inverter S Paper detected Not detected Duplex Entrance S Paper detected Not detected Duplex Exit S Paper detected Not detected By pass PE S Paper detected Not detected By pass P Size S 1 Upper PE S Paper detected Not detected Lower PE S Paper detected Not detected
252. ter locating a program press the OK key A blinking underscore or several blinking underscores indicates which value you can change The value in parentheses is the default value of the menu 2 Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad To switch between positive plus and negative minus values press the 9 key 3 To validate the value press the OK key To cancel the value press the cancel key E Activating Copy Mode You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running When you do so the copier outputs images or patterns that help you adjust the SP mode program 1 Press the key The copy mode is activated 2 Specify copy settings and press the key 3 To return to the SP mode press the key NOTE You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated Quitting Programs Ending S SP Mode Press the key or the cancel key to quit the program You can end the SP mode by pressing one of these keys several times 5 2 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 2 SP MODE TABLES BASIC The tables in this section 5 1 2 list the service programs SPs that are available when the optional controller box B658 is NOT installed For the SPs that are available with the optional controller box see the next section 5 1 3 The following keys are used e Asterisk The settings are saved in the NVRAM Most of them return to the default values when you execute SP5 801 002 5 1 7 e DFU The men
253. th the polygonal mirror motor operating 2 A4 LT copying 3 Not APS mode 4 100 size 5 Paper feed from the upper tray Copy Number Input Numeric keypad 1 to 99 increment decrement Manual Image Density 5 steps Automatic Reset Default is 60 seconds Can be set from 10 to 999 seconds with user tools Automatic Shut off Default is 1 minute Can be set from 1 to 240 minutes with user tools SPEC 3 SPECIFICATIONS Copy Paper Capacity Toner Replenishment Optional Equipment Toner Yield Copy Tray Capacity Memory 1 December 2003 Paper Tray 250 sheets B121 250 sheets x 2 B122 B123 Optional Paper Tray Unit 500 sheets x 1 or 500 sheets x 2 Bypass Tray 100 sheets sheets up to 432 mm 17 40 postcards 10 envelopes NOTE Copy weight 80 g m 20 Ib Cartridge replacement 260 g cartridge Platen cover Auto document feeder Auto reverse document feeder Paper tray unit 1 tray Paper tray unit 2 trays 1 bin tray Tray heater Optics anti condensation heater Fax unit Handset Printer scanner unit GW board IEEE 1394 IEEE 1284 Wireless LAN Bluetooth PostScript 3 NRS CSS kit 9k copies A4 LEF 696 full black 1 to 2 copying normal text mode 250 sheets Basic Model 16 MB MFP Model 64 MB 128 MB DIMM SPEC 4 1 December 2003 SPECIFICATIONS Duplex Unit B123 only Copy Paper Size Maximum A3 11 x 17 Minimum A5 81 2 x 11 Copy Paper Weight 64 90 g
254. the scanner SP4 010 B121S907 WMF SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 5 1 5 ID SENSOR ERROR ANALYSIS SP2 221 The image quality may become very bad when the ID sensor does not operate properly However there is no such SC code that indicates ID sensor malfunction instead SP2 221 shows you some information on the ID sensor Check this information when the image quality is not very good The table lists the information shown with SP2 221 ID Sensor Error Analysis SP Error condition Possible cause Remarks SP2 221 1 Vsg Vsg 2 5V or e ID sensor defective VG in the display Vsg Vsp lt 1 00V ID sensor dirty e Drum not charged SP2 221 2 Vsp Vsp gt 2 5V or e Toner density very low in the display Vsg Vsp lt 1 00V 10 sensor pattern not created SP2 221 3 Power Vsg lt 3 5V e ID sensor defective Power source PW in the display when maximum power sensor dirty for the ID 979 is applied Drum not get charged sensor light SP2 221 4 Vsdp No Error Conditions SP2 221 5 Vt Vt gt 4 5V or e TD sensor defective Vt 0 2V SP2 221 6 Vts 5 74 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 6 DISPLAY APS DATA SP4 301 1 Sensor Positions The APS auto paper select sensors are arranged as shown in the diagram B1218919 WMF Reading the Data Paper Size 11000000 81 2x13 D Paper Size 00110000 A4 D DF Open 1
255. the TD sensor gain value Carry this out after replacing the developer or the TD sensor 5 30 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ID Sensor Error Analysis 5 1 5 Vsg Displays the Vsg value Vsp Displays the Vsp value PWM Displays the PWM value Vsdp Displays the Vsdp value Vt Displays the Vt value Vts Displays the Vts value Transfer Current Adjustment Normal paper 2 4 mA 1 2 mA 0 0mA 1 2 mA 2 4 mA Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray Use a high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper within spec from a paper tray 6 12 2 Thick Special paper 2 4 mA 1 2 mA 0 0mA 1 2 mA 2 4 mA Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by pass tray Use a high setting a if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by pass tray or b if waste toner is re attracted from the drum which can occur when using transparencies er 6 12 2 Duplex 2 4 mA 1 2 mA 0 0mA 1 2mA 2 4 mA Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job Use this SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies wr 6 12 2 Cleaning 10 0 21 1 mA step Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning Increase the current if toner remains on the roller after cleaning Remaining toner may cause dirty backg
256. the drum surface and the transfer roller at the proper time for aligning the copy paper and the developed image on the drum surface Then the transfer roller applies a high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper At the same time the paper is electrostatically attracted to the transfer roller 7T PAPER SEPARATION Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrostatic attraction between the paper and the transfer roller The discharge plate grounded helps separate the paper from the drum 8 CLEANING The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum surface after the image transfers to the paper 9 QUENCHING The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge on the drum surface 6 8 1 December 2003 SCANNING 6 4 SCANNING 6 4 1 OVERVIEW B121D907 WMF 1 Exposure Lamp 5 Scanner Motor 2 1st Scanner 6 Original Length Sensor 3 Exposure Glass 7 Original Width Sensors 4 Lens Block 8 Scanner H P Sensor The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp a xenon lamp The image is reflected onto a CCD charge coupled device on the lens block via the 1st 2nd and 3rd mirrors and through the lens on the lens block The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp a reflector and the 1st mirror A lamp stabilizer energizes the exposure lamp The light reflected by the reflector is of a
257. tion make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet Avoid multi wiring Be sure to ground the machine 1 Input voltage North and South America Taiwan 110 120 V 60 Hz 12A Europe Asia 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 7 A 1 3 COPIER INSTALLATION 1 2 COPIER INSTALLATION 1 2 1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS NCAUTION Rated voltage for peripherals Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets ADF ARDF Rated voltage output connector for accessory Max DC24 V Paper Tray Unit Rated voltage output connector for accessory Max DC24 V 1 2 2 ACCESSORY CHECK Check that you have the accessories indicated below Description 1 December 2003 B1211905 WMF Operation Instructions General Settings 17 29 Operation Instructions Copy Reference 17 29 NECR English 17 NECR Multi Language 27 29 Model Nameplate 22 29 Model Name Decal 22 EU Safety Sheet 22 24 26 27 1 December 2003 COPIER INSTALLATION 1 2 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE NCAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 5 15 T a 1 Remove filament tape and other padding 2 Open the front door and remove the toner bottle holder A B1211912 WMF 3 Open the right door B and remove the PCU photoconductor unit C NOTE The PCU is locked when the right door is closed
258. tration roller By pass tray 0 10 6 1 mm step 2nd 3rd 4th tray 0 10 3 1 mm step Optional Tray Adj Adjusts the reverse time for the upper and lower paper lift motors 1st optional 2 2 0 1 step 2nd optional Detailed Descriptions Optional Paper Tray Unit By pass Envelope 0 Disabled 12 Enabled The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program SP1 911 001 and you select Thick Paper as the paper type of the by pass tray gt System Settings gt Tray Paper Settings gt Paper Type Bypass Tray 5 29 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 SP2 XXX Drum Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Printing 2100 1500 1700 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when printing The actually applied voltage changes automatically as charge roller voltage correction is carried out The value you set here becomes the base value on which this correction is carried out ID sensor pattern 0 400 300 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when generating the Vsdp ID sensor pattern as part of charge roller voltage correction The actual charge roller voltage is obtained by adding this value to the value of SP2 001 1 Erase Margin Adjustment Leading edge 0 0 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 1 5 mm Adjusts the leading edge erase margin Trailing 0
259. tray cassette and the rear cover E B1211126 WMF 1 26 1 December 2003 TRAY HEATERS 1 10 2 LOWER TRAY HEATER TWO TRAY MODEL ONLY 2 15 T B1211129 WMF G 4678 BE D B1211930 WMF B1211122 WMF 1 Remove the 2nd tray cassette A 2 Remove the rear lower cover er 3 3 2 3 B123 only Remove the DCB B with bracket 2 x 4 x 3 4 Pass the connector C through the opening D and install the tray heater E amp x 1 5 Join the connectors F G 6 Reinstall the 2nd tray cassette DCB and rear lower cover TRAY HEATERS 1 December 2003 1 10 3 TRAY HEATERS FOR THE OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNITS 1 Remove the rear cover for the paper tray unit A x 2 B1211202 WMF 2 Two tray unit only Remove the cable Onesttay papsr fes units guide B 7 x 1 i 3 Install the clamps C C B1211007 WMF Two tray paper feed unit B B1211004 WMF 1 28 1 December 2003 TRAY HEATERS One t feed unit 4 Pass the connector A through the ere opening B 5 Install the tray heater C 2 x 1 Installation B1211009 WMF Two tray paper feed unit B B1211005 WMF 1 29 TRAY HEATERS 1 December 2003 One tray paper feed unit Clamp the cables A as shown 7 Join the connectors B 8 Two tray unit only Reinstall the cable guide 9 One tray
260. ts are properly set in the brackets 13 Remove the positioning tools 14 Reassemble the machine and check the operation 1 December 2003 LASER UNIT 3 5 LASER UNIT NWARNING Laser beam can seriously damage your eyes Be absolutely sure that the main power switch is off and that the machine is unplugged before accessing the laser unit 3 5 1 LOCATION OF CAUTION DECAL te 96 os O0 5 5 9 lt 474 CAUTION VORSICHT INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPCSURE TO BEAM UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG B121R962 WMF WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN gt 5 lt 22 B121R963 WMF LASER UNIT 1 December 2003 3 5 2 TONER SHIELD GLASS 1 Open the front door 2 Lift the toner cartridge latch A 3 Press the toner shield glass cover B to the left and pull it out 4 Pull out the toner shield glass C B B121R964 WMF 3 5 3 LASER UNIT Toner shield glass e 3 5 2 Copy tray er 3 3 3 Pull out the upper paper tray Front cover er 3 3 6 E Laser unit D EB x 2 2 x 4 NOTE The screw at the left front position E is longer than the other three oe x dec B121R965 WMF 1 December 2003 LASER UNIT 3 5 4 LD UNIT CAUTION Do not touch the paint locked screw A The LD position is adjusted before shipment 1 Laser unit 3 5 3 2 LD unit A x 1 NOTE Do not screw the LD unit in too tightly when install
261. ts the trailing edge erase margin The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1 2 mm Left side 0 0 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 1 5 mm Adjusts the left edge erase margin The rear left edge is this value plus 0 3 mm Right side 0 0 9 0 2 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 1 Specification 2 2 5 1 5 mm Adjusts the right edge erase margin The rear right edge is this value plus 0 3 mm Development Bias Adjustment Printing 1500 200 650 1 V step Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller when printing This can be adjusted as a temporary measure if faint copies are being produced due to an aging drum ID sensor pattern 2 LL 220 V 1 L 260 V 0 N 300 V 1 H 340 V 2 HH 380 V Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller when generating the ID sensor pattern The actual voltage applied is this setting plus the value of SP2 201 1 The setting affects ID sensor pattern density which in turn affects the toner supply Outputs after Near End 0 50 pages 1 20 pages Sets the number of copy print fax pages that can be made after toner near end has been detected Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image ratio Developer Initialization Initializes both the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and the TD sensor gain value Carry this out after replacing the developer or the T
262. ttings 5845 1 FTP Port No 0 65535 3670 1 Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server 5845 2 IP Address Primary Range 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting 5845 6 Delivery Error Display Time 0 999 300 1 Netfiles Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device 5845 8 IP Address Secondary Range 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting 5845 9 Delivery Server Model 0 4 0 1 5845 10 Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I O device 0 Unknown 1 SG1 Provided 2 SG1 Package 3 SG2 Provided 4 SG2 Package Delivery Svr Capability 0 255 0 1 Changes the capability of the reget deus 1 Sender specification required if set to 1 Bit6 is set to 0 5 48 1 December 2003 5846 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE UCS Settings 5846 1 Machine ID For Delivery Server Displays ID
263. uis for the design factory use only You must not change the settings Brackets The brackets enclose the setting rage default value and minimum step with unit as follows Minimum Maximum Default Step e SSP The program is in the SSP Mode only Consult your super visor before you use this program SP1 XXX Feed Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the printing leading edge registration from paper trays All Trays 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 By pass Duplex Side to Side Registration Adjusts the printing side to side registration from each paper feed station using the Trimming Area Pattern SP5 902 No 10 Adjustments are supported for all 4 possible feed trays including optional trays The SP1 002 1 setting is applied to all trays not just the 1st tray Settings for trays 2 to 4 are offsets relative to the SP1 002 1 setting For duplex copies the value for the front side is determined by SP1 002 1 to 4 and the value for the rear side is determined by SP1 002 6 1st tray 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 1 mm step 3 13 2nd tray 3rd tray 4th tray By pass Duplex Paper Feed Timing Adjusts the amount of buckle the paper feed clutch applies to the paper after the registration sensor is activated A higher setting applies greater buckling 1st tray 0 10 5 1 mm step 2nd tray B122 B123 only 0 10 5 1 mm step Optional tray 0 10 5 1 mm
264. uplex Inv Motor Hold Dup Trans Motor Hold Polygon Motor Polygon M LD LD DF Transport Motor DF Feed Motor DF Feed Clutch DF Pickup Solenoid DF Stamp Solenoid 5 80 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Component DF Gate Solenoid 1 bin Gate Solenoid 1 bin Tray Motor 1 bin Tray Motor Hold Fusing Solenoid Duplex Fan Motor High Duplex Fan Motor Low 5 1 10 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT SP5 811 Specifying Characters SP5 811 001 specifies the serial number For the basic machine the machine without the optional controller you use the numeric keypad For the MFP machine the machine with the optional controller you use the numeric keypad and the optional operation panel Basic MACHINE A serial number consists of 11 characters You can change each character b pressing one of the first 11 keys on the numeric keypad CD 2 de 9 For example when you press the 7 key the first character of the serial number changes as follows 0 gt 1 525 58 595A5B5 5XoY Z When you press the 3 key the second character changes likewise You can specify a digit O to 9 or a capital letter A to Z for the first four characters of a serial number and you can specify a digit in the other seven characters not capital letters MFP MACHINE You use the numeric keypad to type nu
265. using unit drive gear When 9 Released the solenoid is on it pulls the top end of the gear holder to the right and the gear holder turns clockwise As a result the drive gear is released from the fusing unit drive gear Off Engaged The release solenoid comes on when you turn on the main switch if the fusing temperature is 18 C or higher e Contact Release Control The solenoid releases the drive gear from the fusing unit drive gear The fusing lamps heat the hot roller L more effectively since the heat is not conducted to the pressure roller K When the hot roller becomes hot enough the release solenoid turns off letting the drive gear engage with the fusing unit drive gear 2 Os 5 9 as 6 61 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 1 December 2003 6 13 3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT The entrance guide A is adjustable for paper thickness to prevent creasing The outer screw holes B on each side are used as the default setting If creasing occurs frequently in the fusing unit adjust the entrance guide to the right by securing it with the inner holes C This allows more direct access to the gap between the hot roller and the pressure roller B121D967 WMF 6 13 4 PRESSURE ROLLER The pressure springs A constantly apply pressure between the hot roller B and the pressure roller C Applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs The sp
266. usted with SP2 201 1 6 40 1 December 2003 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 5 TONER SUPPLY Toner Bottle Replenishment Mechanism B121D946 WMF When a toner bottle is placed in the bottle holder unit A and the unit is pushed in completely toner shutter B moves against the side C of the PCU When the toner bottle holder lever D is put back in the original position the cap E on the toner bottle is pulled away and kept in place by the chuck F The toner supply mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the development unit The toner bottle has a spiral groove G that helps move toner to the development unit To add a new toner bottle first lift the toner bottle holder When this is done the chuck releases the toner bottle cap into its proper position to prevent toner from scattering o LE Ss 59 3 Then when the bottle holder unit is pulled out add new toner bottle the toner shutter shuts to block the opening as a result of pressure from a spring 6 41 DEVELOPMENT 1 December 2003 Toner Supply Mechanism A E B121D947 WMF D B121D948 WMF The toner supply motor A drives the toner bottle B and the mylar blades C First the toner falls down into the toner bottle holder The toner supply mylar blades transfer the toner to the slit D When the PCU is installed in the machine the shutter E above the PCU is opened by the toner bottle holder Then the to
267. ustom dI mm 5 66 1 December 2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE C PrtPGS Ppr Tray 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total print count classified by paper source C PrtPGS Ppr Tray Bypass Tray C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 2 C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 3 C PrtPGS Ppr Size Tray 4 T PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total print count classified by paper size This is the total for all application programs Normal Recycled Special Thick Normal Back Thick Back OHP Other C PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages printed by the copier application program Normal Recycled Special Thick Normal Back Thick Back OHP Other F PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages printed by the fax application program Normal Recycled Special Thick Normal Back Thick Back OHP Other P PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 0 1 sheet step Displays the total number of pages printed by the fax application program Normal Recycled 5 67 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 1 December 2003 Special Thick Normal Back Thick Back OHP Other T PrtPGS FIN 0 9999999
268. water or alcohol Friction pads Dry or damp cloth Relay clutch B384 only Feed clutches B384 only Relay roller B384 only Dry cloth 1 December 2003 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTER 2 2 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTER After preventive maintenance work reset the PM counter SP7 804 001 as follows 1 Activate the SP mode see section 5 1 Select SP 7 804 001 Reset PM Counter Press the OK key A The message Execute is displayed Press the button B below the message Execute The messages Execute followed by Cancel and Execute are displayed To reset the PM counter press the button C below the message Execute Wait until the message Completed is displayed Quit the SP mode 2 6 99 S g S z B121P901 WMF B121P901 WMF B121P901 WMF C B121P901 WMF 2 3 1 December 2003 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 GENERAL CAUTIONS Do not turn off the main switch while any of the electrical components are active Doing so may result in damage to units such as the PCU as they are pulled out or replaced 3 1 1 PCU PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT The PCU consists of the OPC drum charge roller development unit and cleaning components Observe the following precautions when handling the PCU 1 Never touch the drum surface with bare hands If the drum surface is dirty or if you have accide
269. where it is converted into an analog data signal This data is converted to a digital signal processed and stored in the memory At the time of printing the data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode 2 DRUM CHARGE In the dark the charge roller gives a negative charge to the organic photo conductive OPC drum The charge remains on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark 6 7 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW 1 December 2003 3 LASER EXPOSURE The processed data scanned from the original is retrieved from the memory and transferred to the drum by a laser beam which forms an electrical latent image on the drum surface The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on the laser beam intensity which is controlled by the BICU board 4 DEVELOPMENT The magnetic developer brush on the development roller comes in contact with the latent image on the drum surface Toner particles are electrostatically attached to the areas of the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the drum 5 ID SENSOR The laser forms a sensor pattern on the drum surface The ID sensor measures the reflectivity of the pattern The output signal is one of the factors used for toner supply control Also the ID sensor measures the reflectivity of the drum surface The output signal is used for charge roller voltage control 6 IMAGE TRANSFER Paper is fed to the area between

Service Manual: Kir-C2, K-C2 (B121/B122/B123) Aficio 2015/Aficio

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents